You are on page 1of 324

SA release schedule line

Purchasing (MMPUR)
Line in the delivery schedule of a scheduling agreement release that is transmitted to the vendor. SAP distinguishes between an SA release schedule line that is generated when the release is created, and a schedule line in the overall delivery schedule for the scheduling agreement that is generated in the system as a result of the requirements planning process. When creating an SA release, you can use the creation profile to establish whether: Quantities and dates in the schedule lines for a scheduling agreement are to correspond to SA release schedule lines Quantities and dates in the schedule lines of a scheduling agreement are to be consolidated (aggregated) when SA release schedule lines are created

SADT
Business Navigator (BCCUSTOLNAV)
Structured Analysis and Design Technique

safety margin after production


Logistics General (LO)
Number of working days used as a float for scheduling between the order due date and the scheduled finish date. The safety margin after production is used for compensating malfunctions within the order production.

safety measures safety stock


Material Requirements Planning (PPMRP)
Quantity of stock held to satisfy unexpectedly high requirements in the stockingup period. The purpose of the safety stock is to prevent a material shortage from occurring. In order to determine the safety stock level, you must first specify the risk of a material shortage and also the desired service level. Usually the safety stock will not be used in production.

safety time
CrossApplication Components (APOCA)
Used to calculate the target stock level. Safety time is defined in the product master data. The target stock level corresponds to the safety stock plus requirements within the safety time.

Safety time (in work days)


Material Requirements Planning (PPMRP)
Number of days for which the warehouse stock of a material covers the requirements without any new receipts. The safety time corresponds to the actual range of coverage. The safety time can be defined by the user as a planned value. If you define a safety time, the requirements in MRP are brought forward by this defined number of work days, and the system creates corresponding procurement proposals that are appropriate for the scheduling. This ensures that the planned warehouse stock is able to cover the requirements within the defined number of days.

salary group
Benefits (PABN)
A customerdefined salary range, according to which the cost, credit, coverage, or employee/employer contributions for a benefit plan vary. Salary groups can be used alone or in conjunction with other criteria groups to determine these amounts. The system dynamically sorts employees into salary groups at the time of processing, on the basis of their benefit salary.

sales
Financial Accounting (FI)
Sum of the goods and services sold by a company in a certain period, valued at valid sales prices.

Sales Operations Planning


Production Planning and Control (PP)
Sales & Operations Planning (SOP) is a flexible forecasting and planning tool with which sales, production, and other supply chain targets can be set on the basis of historical, existing, and/or estimated future data. Resource planning can also be carried out to determine the amounts of the work center capacities and other resources required to meet these targets. SOP supports both the highlevel planning of complex planning hierarchies and the detailed planning of finished products. Thus, either a topdown or a bottomup approach to planning is possible. The system can be 2

configured either such that target values set at one organizational level are distributed (aggregated and disaggregated) automatically and consistently to all the other organizational levels in the hierarchy (for example, to all distribution channels, materials, and plants in a particular sales organization), or such that each level is planned separately. Sales & Operations Planning is made up of two elements: standard SOP and flexible planning. Standard SOP comes largely preconfigured with the system. Flexible planning offers multiple options for customized configuration. Planning in standard SOP is based on product group hierarchies and is always carried out level by level. Flexible planning is carried out on hierarchies containing any chosen organizational levels (for example, sales organization, distribution channel, material, and plant). Moreover, in flexible planning the content and layout of planning screens can be defined by the users. The component can be run in a distributed environment with the aid of Application Link Enabling (ALE).

sales accrual/deferral
Real Estate Management (RE)
Method for the accounting accrual/deferral for the reported, planned sales or sales revenue of a salesbased rental agreement.

sales accrual/deferral
Real Estate Management (RE)
Method for the accounting accrual/deferral for the reported, planned sales or sales revenue of a salesbased leaseout.

sales activity
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Sales and distribution document used to record information resulting from interaction with a customer or sales prospect. The following types of sales activity are available in the standard system: Sales call Telephone call Sales letter The sales activities can be accessed by both officebased and field sales personnel and can be used as a basis for new sales activities. For example, a field sales employee can use the information from a telephone call to plan a sales call.

sales agent

IndustrySpecific Components for Media (ISM)


Business partner who arranges for a customer to receive services from a publisher. The sales agent involved in obtaining a sales order can receive a gift (gift recipient) or commission (commission recipient) when the order is placed. Gift recipients are usually private individuals who occasionally obtain an order for the publisher, while commission recipients are normally fulltime sales agents.

sales and administration costs


Controlling (CO)
Costs arising from the company's sales and administrative activities. These costs are usually recorded in Cost Center Accounting (COOMCCA). They can be passed on to: The products (by means of overhead allocation) Profitability Analysis (by means of assessment) Examples of such costs: Packaging costs Freight costs Administrative costs

sales and distribution document


Sales and Distribution (SD)
Database document for processing sales and distribution transactions. The following different kinds of sales and distribution documents exist: sales documents shipping documents billing documents A sales and distribution document consists of a header and any number of items: The document header contains data which is valid for the entire document (terms of payment, shipto address, texts and so on). The document items contain data on the goods or services which the customer wants to purchase.

sales and operations plan

Sales and Operations Planning (PPSOP)


Sales quantities and the resulting production quantities for a material/plant (SKU) or product group in a specific planning horizon. The difference between the production quantity and the sales quantity in any month is the closing stock for that month.

sales area
Sales and Distribution (SD)
A sales area is a specific combination of sales organization, distribution channel and division.

sales campaign
Vehicle Management System (ISAVMS)
Promotion campaign valid for a specified period of time which aims at selling certain vehicle models or vehicle configurations at a favorable price. Examples are: sales of phaseout models for which there is already a successor model available on the market, sales of nonpopular configurations remaining on stock etc.

sales contract
Sales and Distribution (SD)
An outline sales agreement valid for a specified period. A customer submits a sales order to release materials or services from the amount agreed in the contract.

sales deal
Sales and Distribution (SD)
An agreement over a limited period to promote sales of a particular product or product group within a promotion. A sales deal normally contains a discount or special terms of delivery.

sales deduction account


Sales and Distribution (SD)
Account to which surcharges and discounts are posted.

sales district
Sales and Distribution (SD)
A geographical sales district or sales region. You can assign customers to a sales district and later use the sales district to generate sales statistics.

sales document
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Data base document that represents a business transaction in the sales department. The following sales document types exist: inquiry quotation sales order outline agreement (contracts and scheduling agreements) complaints (returns, credit memo request, debit memo request) Further processing in sales and distribution, such as creating shipping and billing documents, is carried out on the basis of the sales documents. A sales document consists of header data which is valid for the whole document and of any number of items which contains information about goods or services which the customer wants to purchase.

sales document category


Sales and Distribution (SD)
Classifies individual categories of sales documents that can be processed in the sales and distribution component module. The category controls how the system processes the document. Categories of sales documents include inquiries and quotations, sales orders or outline agreements. Several sales document types are combined in a sales document category. For example, the sales document category "sales order" includes the following sales document types: standard order (OR), cash sales (BV), or rush order (SO). The sales document types are assigned to sales document categories for each document type in Customizing for Sales and Distibution.

sales document item


Product Cost Controlling (COPC)
Item in a sales document. The sales document can be a customer inquiry, a quotation, or a sales order.

If the sales document item carries costs and revenues, it can function as a cost object in the Product Cost by Sales Order component.

sales document type


Sales and Distribution (SD)
Indicator for controlling the various sales documents defined in the system. Document types allow the system to process different kinds of business transactions in different ways. The standard version of the SAP R/3 System includes a variety of predefined sales document types. You may also define your own. Examples of sales document types include: IN inquiry, QT quotation, OR standard order, etc. Sales document types are grouped into general processing groups known as sales document categories.

sales effectivity
Financial Accounting (FI)
Property of a posting key that is used to update sales with a customer o vendor.

sales employee
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Superordinate term for employees in sales and distribution or the the sales and distribution department of a company.

sales equalization tax


Financial Accounting (FI)
Tax that is posted in some countries in addition to output tax. It is calculated by the vendor and charged to customers who are exempt from tax on sales/purchases. Sales equalization tax is paid to the tax office by the vendor.

sales forecast
Demand Planning (APOFCS)
The amount of sales (in units or dollars) a company expects to achieve during some future period under a given marketing plan and expected market conditions. The sales forecast identifies the amount of units that are likely to be sold and/or the dollar value of what is likely to be sold.

sales grid
Sales and Distribution (ISAFSSD)
A subset of a master grid that contains the grid value variants of a material for use in sales.

sales group
Retail (ISR)
Constituent component in a distribution chain (with a sales manager per sales group, for example). Sales groups can be used for reporting purposes. In its capacity as a customer, a store can have a sales group assigned to it; this sales group is then responsible for sales to this store. If, on the other hand, you also locate sales groups in a store, they will then be responsible for SD sales orders in the store. Employees can be assigned to a sales group.

sales group
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Organizational unit that carries out sales transactions and is internally responsible for them.

sales item
(CRMBTX)
Item type in the business transaction. Depending on its status, a sales item can either be: A sales order item A quotation item or An inquiry item

sales office
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Organizational unit that reflects the geographical aspects of a sales organization. A sales office establishes contact between the firm and the regional market.

sales office
Travel Management (FITV)
Office or agency of a travel service provider. The sales office has access to the Amadeus System and is identified via an office ID specified by Amadeus.

sales order
Sales and Distribution (SD)
A customer request to the company for the delivery of goods or services at a certain time. The request is received by a sales area, which is then responsible for fulfilling the contract.

sales order
CrossApplication Components (APOCA)
A customer request to the company for the delivery of goods or services at a certain time. The request is received by a sales area, which is then responsible for fulfilling the order.

sales order
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Request for a customerrelated service including the quotation for such a service.

sales order costing


Product Cost Controlling (COPC)
Method of costing that costs the items in a sales order. You can also cost the items in inquiries and quotations.

sales order item that carries costs and revenues


Product Cost Controlling (COPC)
Sales order item that is used as a cost object. When a sales order item is the cost object, you use the functions of Product Cost by Sales Order.

sales order stock


Logistics General (LO)
Defined quantity of a material which is held in stock and required for the execution of a sales order. The sales order stock is committed to a particular sales order. Components can only be used to produce the material ordered by the customer, and the material produced can only be delivered to the customer with reference to the relevant order.

sales order stock


Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
Defined quantity of a product which is held in stock and required for the execution of a sales order. The sales order stock is committed to a particular sales order. Components can only be used to produce the product ordered by the customer, and the product produced can only be delivered to the customer with reference to the relevant order.

sales organization
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Organizational unit within Logistics which structures the company according to its sales requirements. A sales organization is responsible for selling materials and services.

sales organization responsible


Organizational Data (CRMORG)
The responsible sales organization is responsible for a specific transaction or part of a sales cycle. Die verantwortliche Verkaufsorganisation trgt die Gesamtverantwortung. Die zustndige und die verantwortliche Verkaufsorganisation knnen dieselbe Organisationseinheit sein.

sales plan
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Specification of sales quantities for future periods. The sales plan specifies how many units of each finished product or of each product group a company aims to sell. The sales plan is the starting point for demand management and master production scheduling. 10

sales price
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Price at which a material is offered to the customer.

sales price
Retail (ISR)
The price billed to the recipient. Depending on the context, various synonyms are used for the sales price. The sales price can either include tax (gross price) or exclude tax (net price): If the recipients are consumers, the term "consumer price" is also used. This price is a gross price. In the case of logistic units such as distribution centers that supply other units (stores), the term "transfer price" is also used. The transfer price is a net price. In the Sales Price Calculation function of SAP Retail, the "final price" is the same as the sales price. When sales prices are calculated for retail distribution chains, the final price is a gross price; when sales prices are calculated for distributioncenter and wholesale distribution chains, it is a net price.

sales price basis


Project System (PS)
The sales price basis is a processing view in the sales pricing or quotation. It shows the planned costs from the service order or project,after they have been summarized using the Dynamic Item Processor. The summarized items, called "dynamic items", form the items in the sales price basis. You use the sales price basis to determine whether the system includes the costs summarized in dynamic items in whole, in part, or not at all when generating the quotation or calculating the sales pricing.

sales price calculation


Retail (ISR)
Function in Pricing that enables you to calculate sales prices for the materials that are carried by a retail company in different steps of the value chain, and to store them as condition records in the system. Calculating sales prices for materials is arranged according to the usual order of goods flow in retailing. Thus, the two main elements of sales price calculation are: Determining purchase prices (purchase price determination) Determining sales prices (sales price determination) The margin is also calculated as a characteristic key figure for the relationship between sales and purchase price. Various different procedures are used for determining sales and purchase prices. The sales price can, for 11

example, be calculated from the purchase price using a planned markup; it can, however, also be derived from competitor prices. The sales price calculation function also allows mass maintenance of conditions. Sales price calculations can be performed for a range of materials and organizational levels. The different organizational levels here, for example stores and distribution centers, represent the various steps in the value chain.

sales price view


Project System (PS)
The sales price view is a view for processing quotations or sales pricings in resourcerelated billing. It shows the items from the sales price basis or expenditure view, sorted and combined per SD items. The system uses SD price determination to calculate the prices for the items. You can use the sales price view to process line items and header items from the sales pricing or resourcerelated billing, with the help of condtions in SD.

sales promotion
Media Sales and Distribution (ISMSD)
Limited marketing activity aimed at attracting new customers.

sales promotion
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Document in Sales Support that you use to inform customers or sales prospects of marketing activities and events such the launch of a new product or a trade fair. A sales promotion can simply be a list of addresses used as a worklist (sales promotion type: collectively generated sales activities). Alternatively, a sales promotion can be used to manage direct mailing campaigns (sales promotion type: direct mailing campaign). In this case, it consists of a list of addresses, a letter and sometimes, enclosures.

sales promotion
Commissions (ISISCS)
A salesdriven promotion that involves special commission and/or valuation limited to a specific period of time.

sales relevance

12

Financial Accounting (FI)


Property of a posting key, which, when used, updates the sales figures with a customer or vendor.

sales report
Real Estate Management (RE)
Obligation of a commercial tenant on the basis of a salesbased leaseout committing him to report the sales to the landlord in regular intervals in order to determine the amount of rent to be paid.

sales report
Real Estate Management (RE)
Obligation of a commercial tenant on the basis of a salesbased rental agreement committing him to report the sales to the landlord in regular intervals in order to determine the amount of rent to be paid.

sales representative
Sales and Distribution (SD)
responsible for sales support and sales in a specific tasks area (customer circle, product, region amongst others). A sales representative can be employed externally (mobile) or internally.

sales source
Media Sales and Distribution (ISMSD)
Characteristic that describes how a purchase agreement came into being. It is included in the campaign framework.

sales status
Vehicle Management System (ISAVMS)
Vehicle status relating to the sale of a vehicle by the importer to the dealer. The sales status documents the progress of the sales process and defines which further actions can be carried out.

sales support

13

Customer Service (ISUCS)


Function which aids marketing by selecting groups of customers according to certain criteria.

sales support
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Component in the SD R/3 System which assists employees in sales and distribution and marketing with all activities in the areas of business development and customer service. The sales support component enables the user to obtain and use data relevant for sales and distribution on customers, sales prospects, contact persons, competitors and their products.

sales tax
(CATTE)
Tax imposed as a percentage of the price of goods (and sometimes of services).

sales territory
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
Geographical region a sales person is responsible for.

sales transaction
(CRM)
Business object that is used for implementing sales order processing.

sales unit
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Unit of measure in which a material is sold. Several alternative sales units of measure can be defined for one material. A conversion factor allows the system to refer to the base unit of measure.

sales variant

14

Retail (ISR)
Logistical variant of a generic material for the unit of measure in which stock is managed for sale to consumers. Sales are posted from stock in this unit of measure. A generic material can have only one sales variant. This variant can be sold in different pack sizes that have to be entered as alternative units of measure in the material master record for the variant.

salesbased lease out


Real Estate Management (RE)
Leaseout with the adjustment type "salesbased rent" meaning that the rent increase is determined by the sales reports of the commercial tenant.

salesbased rent
Real Estate Management (RE)
The rent depends on the commercial tenant's sales. The salesbased settlement determines the rent amount and any adjustments of the advance payments, based on the sales reports and the conditions of the salesbased leaseout.

salesbased rent
Real Estate Management (RE)
The rent depends on the commercial tenant's sales. The salesbased settlement determines the rent amount and any adjustments of the advance payments, based on the sales reports and the conditions of the salesbased rental agreement.

salesbased rent adjustment method


Real Estate Management (RE)
A type of rent adjustment allowing salesbased rent adjustments for a leaseout. The rent is calculated on the basis of sales made by the tenant in the offices. The adjustment type is set on the leaseout.

salesbased rent adjustment method

15

Real Estate Management (RE)


A type of rent adjustment allowing salesbased rent adjustments for a rental agreement. The rent is calculated on the basis of sales made by the tenant in the offices. The adjustment type is set on the rental agreement.

salesbased rent adjustment type


Real Estate Management (RE)
A type of rent adjustment that specifies that the rent for a particular leaseout is charged in proportion to the sales made on the premises.

salesbased rental agreement


Real Estate Management (RE)
Rental agreement with the adjustment type "salesbased rent" (usually 3 = salesbased rent) meaning that the rent increase is determined by the sales reports of the commercial tenant.

salesorderrelated production
Product Cost Controlling (COPC)
Type of production in which a product is manufactured specially for a specific customer. Salesorderrelated production comprises two subcategories: mass production based on sales orders and complex maketoorder production. If you use salesorderrelated production, you can choose to work with a valuated or an unvaluated sales order stock. With a valuated sales order stock, all goods movements are reflected by inventory postings in Financial Accounting. With an unvaluated sales order stock, you determine the inventory value at the end of the period using results analysis. The following cost management approaches are available in salesorderrelated production, depending on the type of business processing involved: Cost management at the level of individual sales document items (Product Cost by Sales Order) Cost management at the level of orders (Product Cost by Order) or periods (Product Cost by Period)

16

salvage
Claims Management (ISISCM)
The amount recovered from the sale of damaged property.

sample
DistributorResellerManagement (ISHTDRM)
A trial shipment of manufacturer/supplier's material sent free of charge by a distributor/reseller to an end customer. For a given accounting period, distributor/resellers can reclaim their investment upto a predetermined limit.

sample
Quality Management (QM)
One or several units taken from the inspection lot (population), to gain information about the quality of the inspection lot. The name sample is used to describe distinguishable (discrete) units, for example, piece goods that are subject to a sampling procedure.

sample
Logistics Execution (LE)
Quantity of material that has been selected from an inspection lot. This sample quantity is checked to ensure that incoming goods meet required standards. The inspection sample is generally withdrawn from the total quantity of goods received and stored temporarily in an inspection area. Using the WM system, it is also possible to store the inspection sample along with the rest of the quantity received in the warehouse in a normal storage bin. You can then identify it easily for the inspection process at a later time.

sample
(CRMMKT)
A representative selection of business partners used for performance reasons to calculate the expected size of a target group. When creating target groups, the selection conditions defined in a profile are tested against a sample of business partners to see how many business partners the target group is likely to contain. Depending on the result, the selection conditions can be changed and refined until the approximate number of business partners required is 17

reached.

sample
Foreign Trade (SDFT)
Piece, segment, portion or prototype of a product used for testing or demonstration purposes. In international commerce, samples are generally duty free and are usually brought into a Customs territory at the cost of the exporter.

sample account
Financial Accounting (FI)
Special master record via which values can be predefined for the entry of company codespecific data in G/L account master records. You must also define data transfer rules, which determine how the values are transferred from the sample account.

sample device
Device Management (ISUDM)
Device which is randomly pulled out of a sample lot of devices for a spot check. This device is then removed and inspected in order to evaluate the quality of the entire sample lot.

sample document
Financial Accounting (FI)
Special type of reference document. Data from this document is used to create default entries on the accounting document entry screen. Unlike an accounting document, a sample document does not update transaction figures but merely serves as a data source for an accounting document.

sample function module


General Application Functions (CAGTF)
Function module that describes the interface to an event with its export/import table parameters. The module generally contains no code.

18

sample lot
Device Management (ISUDM)
Any number of devices grouped together to perform a sampling inspection for the following purposes: To extend the calibration validity of these devices (official sample lot) To inspect the quality of these devices internally (internal sample lot)

sample master record


Financial Accounting (FI)
Example of a master record which serves as an input aid for configuring other master records.

sample number
Quality Management (QM)
Identifier of a dependent sample within a double sampling inspection or a multiple sampling inspection. Example: Sample number 10025 and sample number 10026 identify the two samples for a double sampling inspection.

sample quantity
Quality Management (QM)
Quantity of a material or number of samples needed or required for an inspection of one or several inspection characteristics with specific inspection methods.

sample size
Quality Management (QM)
Quantity of units (calculated in sample units) taken from a population or subpopulation in order to be inspected.

sample unit
Quality Management (QM)
The smallest quantity of a product or material that can be inspected. It is measured in sample units of measure. The sample size is therefore always a wholenumber multiple of the sample unit.

19

samplebased physical inventory


Inventory Management (MMIM)
Counting or measuring of a small part of the stock (sample) that is representative of the entire stock. The sample to be inventoried is determined on a mathematicalstatistical basis. A physical inventory count and an inventory adjustment posting are carried out for the items in the sample. On the basis of the inventory adjustment posting, an extrapolation is performed to arrive at an estimated value for the entire stock. If this extrapolation is successful, it is assumed that the book inventory is correct.

samplebased physical inventory profile


Inventory Management (MMIM)
Mechanism for setting parameters for a samplebased physical inventory. To simplify parameter setting during the creation of a samplebased physical inventory, frequently used parameters are recorded in samplebased physical inventory profiles. When you set up a samplebased physical inventory, each parameter then defaults to the value defined in the profile.

sampledrawing instruction
Quality Management (QM)
Instruction that contains all of the required information for drawing one or more samples from the population to be inspected. It receives its information from the sample calculation, which takes place on the basis of the data contained in the inspection plan and in the history.

sampledrawing item
Quality Management (QM)
Specifies how a physical sample is to be drawn.

sampledrawing procedure
Quality Management (QM)
Master data record that controls how physical samples are to be drawn and formed.

20

sampling
Quality Management (QM)
The planned procedure of selection and withdrawal of samples from a lot.

sampling area
Inventory Management (MMIM)
Quantity of stock management units of a samplebased physical inventory, of which only a selection has to be counted. Representative elements are selected at random from the elements in the sampling area. These elements are then counted, and on the basis of the count results an extrapolation is carried out, the result of which is applicable to the entire sampling area.

sampling inspection
Quality Management (QM)
Quality inspection using a sampling plan to evaluate an inspection lot. In the sampling inspection, units are taken from the lot and inspected. Conclusions about the entire lot are then drawn from the inspection results.

sampling plan
Quality Management (QM)
Contains the required information about sample sizes and the criteria used to valuate the results of the sampling inspection.

sampling procedure
Quality Management (QM)
Procedure that determines the sample size for an inspection. The sampling procedure also defines the type of valuation to be used for results recording (attributive, variable, manual, etc.).

sampling procedure

21

Device Management (ISUDM)


Procedure whereby any number of devices is grouped together to perform a sampling inspection for the following purposes: To extend the calibration validity of these devices officially (official sample lot) To inspect the quality of these devices internally (internal sample lot)

sampling scheme
Quality Management (QM)
A collection of sampling plans. A sampling plan relates to the sample size for a specific lot size and defines how and whether the lots are accepted or rejected. In the R/3 System, the structure of the sampling scheme is based on international standards (for example, ISO 3951). However, you can also use sampling schemes based on other sampling procedures.

sampling system
Quality Management (QM)
A collection of sampling schemes with rules for their application.

sampling unit
Quality Management (QM)
Quantity formed for the purposes of physicalsample drawing or sample drawing and therefore regarded as indivisible.

sanctioned party list


Foreign Trade (SDFT)
Official list of individuals or organizations which are denied certain trade privileges or with whom trade has been banned all together. Sanctions may also include the denial of a party the benefit of export licenses, loans, government bonds or funds. They may also include the restriction of services such as assistance in the import or export of goods or the sale of goods to a particular government.

sanctioned party list screening

22

Foreign Trade (SDFT)


Checking of individuals or organizations in an SAP document against the sanctioned party list (denied persons list) to determine whether they have been denied trade privileges.

sandbox client
AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
In the development system, a client other than the official Customizing client, which is used for testing the applications and Customizing functions. It is initially created as a copy of the SAP Reference Client. The entire implementation team has access to this client for experimentation and education. The sandbox client can be used to test changes to essential structures, such as the number of company codes, and to ensure that these changes will work.

Santei
Japan (PYJP)
An annual process in Japan to determine the new monthly standard compensation, which is fundamental to calculate employee's social insurance contribution. It is based on individual employee's payments entitled in May, June and July. A Santei statement can be generated after the process. However, if the condition for Geppen calculation is met at the time for this process, Geppen process should be performed instead. Accordingly, the Geppen statement shall be generated.

SAP AddOn Installation Tool


Online Correction Support (Support Packages) (BCUPGOCS)
Tool that allows you to perform installation and upgrade addons directly from the SAP System.

SAP ArchiveLink
SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
A communication interface between SAP applications and external components that is integrated in the basis components of the R/3 System. SAP ArchiveLink comprises the following interfaces: User interface Interface to SAP applications Interface to external components External storage systems General desktop applications 23

SAP ArchiveLink 4.5 HTTP Content Server Interface


SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Communication interface between the R/3 System and external archiving systems. A certification procedure is available for each of the interface versions.

SAP ArchiveLink Viewer


SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Display component which is supplied as standard with SAP ArchiveLink as part of the R/3 basis component up to and including R/3 Release 4.5A. As of R/3 Release 4.5B, the SAP ArchiveLink viewer will no longer be supplied.

SAP Assistant
Intelligent Terminal / SAP Automation GUI/ SAP Assistant (BCFESAIT)
PC tool for accessing BAPI (Business API), RFC (Remote Function Calls), and IDoc metadata from outside the R/3 System. You can use the SAP Assistant to: Browse metadata information of BAPI and RFCenabled function modules. Call RFCenabled function modules and use their functionality online. Use the BAPI Wizard to generate either Java or C++ classes, with which you can create and manipulate SAP business objects using BAPIs.

SAP Assistant
Component Integration / Installation Windows Components (BCCI)
OLE interface for calling R/3 functions and transactions from external applications. The SAP Assistant exposes ActiveX controls and OLE object classes for logging on to the R/3 System, calling functions and transactions, as well as handling tables and other parameter types. Any application defined as an OLE client can create objects to access information in the R/3 System.

SAP Automation

24

Intelligent Terminal / SAP Automation GUI/ SAP Assistant (BCFESAIT)


Suite of tools, components, and class libraries that allows application developers to integrate external applications from the desktop, a server, or a Web server, with the R/3 System.

SAP Automation GUI interface


Intelligent Terminal / SAP Automation GUI/ SAP Assistant (BCFESAIT)
Product that uses the SAP GUI to interact with the R/3 System. SAP Automation GUI interfaces allow you to: Develop other GUIs for existing R/3 applications. Integrate alternative interfaces with R/3 Monitor or record an interaction of an end user with R/3 screens SAP Automation can be considered as a first step towards moving R/3 interface development to the presentation server, leaving business logic at application level.

SAP Automation RFC interface


Intelligent Terminal / SAP Automation GUI/ SAP Assistant (BCFESAIT)
Product that uses the RFC interface to interact with the R/3 System. SAP Automation RFC interfaces allow external applications to access R/3 by making remote function calls to R/3 functions.

SAP Best Practices


AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
SAP product that consists of an industryspecific ASAP version and a preconfigured system. SAP Best Practices provides industryspecific content and preconfigured systems, covering up to 80% of an industry's requirements. This speeds up the implementation of an SAP industry solution, reducing costs considerably. Industryspecific Question & AnswerDatabases visualize industryspecific processes in value chains and contain canned answers and preanswered CI templates, which help you draw up your Business Blueprint. Preconfigured systems contain industryspecific system settings and master data.

25

SAP Business Framework


Business Framework Architecture (CABFA)
The Business Framework is the family of SAP and nonSAP products that form a componentbased, integrated solution for companies of any size in any industry.

SAP Business Graphics


Graphic (BCFESGRA)
Graphics program for creating two and threedimensional graphics. SAP Business Graphics provides a wide range of graphics options and data interfaces, as well as various commands for manipulating data.

SAP Business Partner


SAP Business Partner (CABP)
Function for creating and managing business partner master data centrally.

SAP Business Technology Map


AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Analytical tool that provides a technological concept for the solution provided by an SAP Solution Map. The SAP Business Technology Map supports a flexible infrastructure and describes the technological requirements for managing the life cycle of SAP software, from implementation to going live to continuous improvement.

SAP Business Warehouse Patch


Online Correction Support (Support Packages) (BCUPGOCS)
(BCUPGOCS)
Contains corrections for the component SAP Business Information Warehouse (SAP BW).

SAP Business Workflow


SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
SAP application component that comprises technologies and tools for automated control and editing of 26

crossapplication processes. This primarily involves coordinating: The persons involved The work steps involved The data to be processed (business objects) The main aims are to cut lead times and the costs of business processes, and to improve transparency and quality.

SAP Calendar Control


Component Integration / Installation Windows Components (BCCI)
Control for entering or displaying dates or date ranges.

SAP Data Provider


Component Integration / Installation Windows Components (BCCI)
Standard data retrieval interface used by controls in the SAP GUI.

SAP Exchange Connector


Email, Fax, and Telephony Interfaces (BCSRVCOM)
Interface for connecting Microsoft Exchange servers to the R/3 System.

SAP Gateway
Gateway/CPIC (BCCSTGW)
Interface for communication between R/2, R/3 and external applications via the CPIC protocol. The SAP Gateway is also referred to as CPIC handler. The RFC (Remote Function Call) is based on the CPIC protocol.

SAP Gateway Monitor


Gateway/CPIC (BCCSTGW)
Program gwmon (at operating system level) or R/3 transaction SMGW. Monitors the SAP Gateway. The SAP Gateway Monitor monitors the SAP Gateway.

27

SAP Generic Output Format


Print and Output Management (BCCCMPRN)
"Raw" output data format which can be formatted by customer converters

SAP Generic Output Format


Print and Output Management (BCCCMPRN)
Data format of print data for external conversion programs.

SAP GoingLive Check


Generic Service tools (SVGST)
A proactive (usually remote) service, in which the components of the SAP System are analyzed to determine whether the system can successfully start production. The check consists of three sessions, during which: Hardware sizing is checked Critical business processes are examined Response times are optimized.

SAP GUI for HTML


Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
HTML version of the SAP GUI. The SAP GUI for HTML dynamically emulates R/3 transactions in a Web browser by mapping R/3 screen elements automatically to HTML via the Internet Transaction Server (ITS). The SAP GUI for HTML is one of two ITS implementation models for developing screenbased applications that allow users to run R/3 transactions directly from a Web browser. The other model is Web Transactions.

SAP GUI reconnect


Database Interface, Database Platforms (BCDB)
Function that enables reconnect of client session to application host when the TCP/IP connection between SAP GUI and application host fails. A dialog box appears offering users the chance to reconnect. From R/3 release 3.0E onwards, the reconnect is always made to the correct application host, even if the R/3 System is configured for logon load balancing.

28

SAP Hierarchy Graphics


Graphic (BCFESGRA)
Graphics program for presenting data in hierarchical structures. SAP Hierarchy Graphics offers a number of options. You can, for example, design hierarchies with different distances and angles, color the nodes according to different presentation criteria or edit numeric values of items.

SAP HPGL Display


Graphic (BCFESGRA)
Tool for displaying graphic files created in HewlettPackard Graphic Language (HPGL) format.

SAP Internet Sales


Internet Sales (CRMISA)
Business solution to facilitate electronic business activites between companies and consumers, or between different companies. Using this solution, you can sell your products directly via the World Wide Web.

SAP kernel
Client/Server Technology (BCCST)
The SAP System has a kernel similar to an operating system. It is a central module which distributes the tasks to be performed (e.g. when a user runs an ABAP program) among available resources (work processes), manages memory and performs other basis services. It is the interface between the underlying operating system and the SAP applications. The SAP Kernel is an independent process (disp+work) underlying every SAP instance.

SAP Knowledge Engineer


SAP Knowledge Warehouse (BCDOCIWB)
Integrated authoring and translation environment for the development and contextsensitive display of HTMLbased online documentation in the R/3 System. SAP uses the development functions of the Knowledge Engineer to create and translate extended help documentation. In future releases, customers can use these functions to create their own documentation and integrate it into the R/3 System online help. You can use the display functions of the Knowledge Engineer to view the R/3 library and extended help, the glossary, the Implementation Guide (IMG) and the Release Notes.

29

SAP Knowledge Provider


SAP Knowledge Provider (BCSRVKPR)
Component integrated in the R/3 Basis System used for managing documents and other objects similar to documents. KPro provides transparent services that can be integrated by various applications. The SAP Knowledge Provider is therefore a crossapplication, crossmedia, information technology infrastructure.

SAP Knowledge Provider services


SAP Knowledge Provider (BCSRVKPR)
The SAP Knowledge Provider (KPro) provides modular services for integrating different client applications. The most important services are as follows: Document Management Service Content Management Service Document Modelling Service

SAP Knowledge Provider Web Server


SAP Knowledge Provider (BCSRVKPR)
Web server used to couple an SAP Knowledge Provider SAP System. The KPro Web Server is implemented as an Internet Information Server (IIS) application.

SAP Library
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Standard function in the menu "Help" for displaying R/3 System online documentation.

SAP license
SAP License (BCCSTSL)
License to operate an SAP R/3 System. If a valid license is not installed, log on to the system is not possible.

SAP List Viewer


30

ABAP List Viewer (BCSRVALV)


Tool used to display and format lists throughout the R/3 System.

SAP LUW
Update (BCCSTUP)
Indivisible business process which is performed either completely or not at all. The SAP LUW of an R/3 transaction usually has to comprise several database LUWs. It usually contains a dialog transaction (which models a business process) and a database update.

SAP Maps
AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Concept that provides a comprehensive approach for implementing software provided by SAP and its partners in 19 industries. Three analytical tools are available for developing and implementing tailormade IT solutions: SAP Solution Maps Visualize industryspecific processes and identify the relevant products provided by SAP and its partners SAP Business Technology Map Provides a technical solution for implementing your Business Blueprint SAP Services Map Provides an overview of the services provided by SAP and its partners

SAP memory
Memory Management (BCCSTMM)
Global, userrelated memory that extends beyond transaction limits. Access to the SAP memory is via SPA/GPA parameters.

SAP menu
Session Manager (BCFESSEM)
Main menu in the R/3 System. From the SAP menu, you can access the full range of R/3 functions.

SAP Network Graphics

31

Graphic (BCFESGRA)
Graphics program for creating, modifying and displaying networks or hierarchies. SAP Network Graphics presents the flow of a project or an individual activity within the project.

SAP Online Store


Retail (ISR)
Internet Application Component based on the functions of the Product Catalog that enables users to create customer data, enter orders, and conduct credit card transactions. The Online Store is a virtual retail outlet that supports the full range of sales transactions.

SAP Package Assembly/Distribution Engine


Online Correction Support (Support Packages) (BCUPGOCS)
Tool that allows SAP partners to generate conflict resolution transports und collective conflict resolution transports for their addons.

SAP Paging
Memory Management (BCCSTMM)
SAP Paging involves the allocation of memory for the current internal session by transferring pages out of memory, similarly to operating system paging. SAP Paging enables the roll area to be extended at ABAP runtime when a large dataset, internal tables, for example, is handled. SAP's memory management concept currently limits SAP Paging to cases where the ABAP commands EXTRACT and EXPORT... TO MEMORY... are used.

SAP Patch Manager


Online Correction Support (Support Packages) (BCUPGOCS)
(BCUPGOCS)
Tool for applying patches to a customer system.

SAP Portfolio Graphics

32

Graphic (BCFESGRA)
Graphics program used as an analysis tool in strategic planning, particularly in multiproduct companies. SAP Portfolio Graphics helps to provide information about the current competitiveness, profitability and liquidity of a company.

SAP protocol
Network Interface, SAProuter (BCCSTNI)
Protocol used by SAP programs that communicate via the NI interface. It is an TCP/IP protocol extension with a length field and some error information. To allow only the SAP protocol, use the initial letter S to define the Route Permission Table. The record is interpreted as usual, but only SAP programs (GUI, Server) can communicate with each other. The NI network interface offers the SAP protocol for communication by default, but it can also use the TCP/IP protocol with external programs (e.g. telnet or lpd) which cannot use the SAP protocol.

SAP Pushbutton Graphics


Graphic (BCFESGRA)
Graphics program for displaying arrays of pushbuttons. To obtain information or to call particular programs, you can click on the individual pushbuttons.

SAP Query
SAP Query (BCSRVQUE)
Tool that allows users without knowledge of the ABAP programming language to define and execute their own reports. To determine the structure of reports in SAP Query, you only have to enter texts, and select fields and options. If necessary, you can edit lists in WYSIWYG mode through drag and drop, and with the functions in the available toolbars.

SAP Reference IMG


Customizing Tools (Techniques) (BCCUSTOL)
Complete SAPSystem Implementation Guide containing all IMG activities sorted by application components.

33

SAP Reference IMG


Customizing (BCCUS)
Complete Implementation Guide for the R/3 System containing all IMG activities arranged by business application component.

SAP Reference Structure


AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Hierarchical structure containing all elements relevant to the implementation process. As of Release 4.6A, the SAP Reference Structure replaces the R/3 Reference Model. The SAP Reference Structure provides the basis for implementing the SAP System. You can use it to conduct business or technical analyses in the Q&Adb and to call up other information related to the R/3 System. The SAP Reference Structure is maintained in the R/3 System and downloaded periodically to the Q&Adb.

SAP Retail
Retail (ISR)
A complete system tailored to the requirements of the retail sector. SAP Retail supports the retailer in practicing competitive assortment policies and efficient consumer response strategies. It provides the flexibility required to make best use of modern selling technologies and the associated categories of retail site involved. SAP Retail includes areas such as Financial Accounting, Controlling and Human Resources. The core system comprises functionality especially developed for the retail sector (ISR).

SAP Retail
Application Components (SAP)
A complete system tailored to the requirements of the retail sector. SAP Retail supports the retailer in practicing competitive assortment policies and efficient consumer response strategies. It provides the flexibility required to make best use of modern selling technologies and the associated categories of retail site involved. SAP Retail includes areas such as Financial Accounting, Controlling and Human Resources. The core system comprises functionality especially developed for the retail sector (ISR).

SAP Retail Store


Retail (ISR)
Independent software package used by store associates to perform many of the R/3 functions directly.

34

Specially designed entry screens and a browserbased user interface make SAP Retail Store particularly userfriendly.

SAP Review Program


AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Program used to evaluate the setup and progress of an SAP implementationproject. It provides executive management and project manager at customer sites a second opinion on whether the implementation is on target. The scope of the review is to investigate the components being implemented as well as technical and project management.

SAP Security Library


Security (BCSEC)
Default security provider provided with R/3. The SAPSECULIB is a dynamic link library that is located on each application server. The SAPSECULIB provides the functions for using digital signatures in R/3. It does not support functions for using digital envelopes and encryption.

SAP server
Client/Server Technology (BCCST)
Part of an R/3 instance. The SAP server provides certain services. Two types of service exist: Application server services Communication services Gateway server (G): Enables communication between application servers on the same or on an exernal system. Message server (M): Enables rapid communication between application servers within the same system.

SAP Services Map


AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Analytical tool that provides an overview of the range of services provided by SAP and its partners. The SAP Services Map encompasses technical support and services that support individual processes or management activities. 35

SAP Services Map


Service (SV)
Analytical tool that provides an overview of the range of services provided by SAP and its partners. The SAP Services Map encompasses technical support and services that support individual processes or management activities.

SAP Smart Forms


SAPscript (BCSRVSCR)
SAP form tool. Smart forms combine previously separate components such as form and print program into a single unit. To print a form, you only need a program for data retrieval and a smart form from which an ABAP function module is automatically generated.

SAP Software Change Registration


Customer Enhancements (BCDWBCEX)
Procedure that registers all modifications to R/3 Repository objects, thereby providing an overview of modified R/3 Repository objects. SAP matchcodes and tuning measures (such as the creation of database indexes and buffers) are not registered by SSCR.

SAP Solution Map


AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Analytical tool used to analyze strategies and processes for specific industries. An SAP Solution Map shows which solutions SAP and its partners provides for these processes and which developments are planned in the future. Together with the SAP Business Technology Map and the SAP Services Map, which display the technical infrastructure and services provided by SAP and its partners, Solution Maps currently provide a complete IT solution for 19 industries. You can generate three different views of a Solution Map: Overview Provides a broad picture of the major processes within each industry Business Blueprint View Shows a more detailed view of the specific functions required for each process Business Blueprint View with Product Coverage: Provides information on the extent to which each function is covered by existing and planned SAP and partner products (limited availability).

36

SAP Solution Map Telecommunications


Telecommunications industry (IST)
Structure that maps the system requirements of a modern telecommunications enterprise seen from an endcustomeroriented integrated process perspective. It helps to understand the requirements of core and supporting processes in telecommunications companies and the resulting system requirements. It also forms a framework for representing both concrete customer requirements and how these requirements are met by SAP and SAP partner products.

SAP Statistical Graphics


Graphic (BCFESGRA)
Graphics program used to display statistical data in the form of a curve. Each diagram can contain up to 16 curves, and each curve can have up to 2000 points. Display options include linear and logarithmic scaling, transposition of axes and diagram formatting (curve color, line width).

SAP Solution Map


AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Analytical tool used to analyze strategies and processes for specific industries. An SAP Solution Map shows which solutions SAP and its partners provides for these processes and which developments are planned in the future. Together with the SAP Business Technology Map and the SAP Services Map, which display the technical infrastructure and services provided by SAP and its partners, Solution Maps currently provide a complete IT solution for 19 industries. You can generate three different views of a Solution Map: Overview Provides a broad picture of the major processes within each industry Business Blueprint View Shows a more detailed view of the specific functions required for each process Business Blueprint View with Product Coverage: Provides information on the extent to which each function is covered by existing and planned SAP and partner products (limited availability).

SAP Solution Map Telecommunications


Telecommunications industry (IST)
Structure that maps the system requirements of a modern telecommunications enterprise seen from an endcustomeroriented integrated process perspective.

37

It helps to understand the requirements of core and supporting processes in telecommunications companies and the resulting system requirements. It also forms a framework for representing both concrete customer requirements and how these requirements are met by SAP and SAP partner products.

SAP Statistical Graphics


Graphic (BCFESGRA)
Graphics program used to display statistical data in the form of a curve. Each diagram can contain up to 16 curves, and each curve can have up to 2000 points. Display options include linear and logarithmic scaling, transposition of axes and diagram formatting (curve color, line width).

SAP system group


Change Transport System (BCCTS)
All R/3 Systems connected by transport routes. A system group can include several transport groups or transport domains. While the transport domain is an administrative unit and the transport group a technical unit, the system group is a logical unit.

SAP system icon


Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Icon in browser view of user menu. You doubleclick on this icon to expand or collapse the list of application areas and functions in the user menu.

SAP system ID
Client/Server Technology (BCCST)
Threecharacter name to identify an SAP System

SAP System Operation Manual


AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Document that contains the SAP standard systems administration procedures and policies. The document should include detailed descriptions, persons responsible, and escalation management plans for all SAP system management activities.

38

SAP System service


Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
Logical function in the SAP System. The set of functions needed to support the SAP System include the DBMS service and the application services. The application services are the dialog, update, enqueue, background, message, gateway, and spool services, not all of which are essential.

SAP task
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Task supplied by SAP, which can be used in SAP workflows. You can use SAP tasks in your own workflows and as models for your own tasks. You cannot change SAP tasks, but you can extend them by adding your own texts as well as additional triggering events and terminating events.

SAP Tree
Graphic (BCFESGRA)
SAP Tree is the name of a graphics product for displaying hierarchies.

SAP Web Framework


(WP)
The SAP Web Framework (SWF) provides functions that make programming Internet services (MiniApps and Internet Application Components) easier. The SWF is installed automatically when you install the SAP Internet Transaction Server (ITS). You can also install the SWF on any other server.

SAP workflow
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Workflow supplied by SAP. Customers can use SAP workflows, but they cannot edit them directly. An SAP workflow can be implemented using taskspecific Customizing. You can create a workflow configuration for an SAP workflow to configure existing steps of the SAP workflow. If you want to change the SAP workflow further, you must create a copy of it.

39

SAP@Web Studio
Internet Transaction Server / SAP@Web Studio (BCFESITS)
PC tool for developing applications that are driven by the Internet Transaction Server (ITS), access data in the R/3 System and users can run from any Web browser. You use the SAP@Web Studio to create, change and manage all the files required by the ITS to run applications. When you have created and tested an application, you can publish the files to an ITS site and sourcecontrol them by checking them into the R/3 Repository. The SAP@Web Studio allows you to define the presentation and dialog flow of ITSdriven Internet applications outside the R/3 System. If you want to perform these tasks inside the R/3 System, you can use the Web Application Builder.

SAPconnect
Email, Fax, and Telephony Interfaces (BCSRVCOM)
RFC interface for integrating external communications with the R/3 System. Third party vendors can connect their communication servers to the R/3 System via SAPconnect. SAPconnect enables the following communication methods to be used in the R/3 System: Fax Internet (SMTP) X.400 Paging (SMS) R/3 R/3 Printer

SAPDBA
Database Interface, Database Platforms (BCDB)
Integrated SAP database administration tool for the INFORMIX and ORACLE database management systems. Although offering similar functionality, SAPDBA for INFORMIX and ORACLE are different tools since they are tailored to work on their respective database platforms. SAPDBA runs independently of the R/3 System, and offers both a menudriven and commandline interface. Some of the functionality offered by SAPDBA is also provided by the Computing Center Management System (CCMS) in the R/3 System.

SAPfind

40

Customizing (BCCUS)
Authoring system you use for developing hypertext books in the R/3 System

SAPforms
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
SAP System interface for the integration of electronic forms. These forms can be used, for example, to execute a work item or start a workflow offline.

SAPforms Designer
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Tool with which SAPforms forms can be processed so that they can communicate with an SAP System.

SAPforms form
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Reproduction of a paper form with fields for displaying and entering data. You create SAPforms forms with programs such as Microsoft Visual Basic or Microsoft Outlook. You can start workflows or execute work items with SAPforms forms without having to install the SAP GUI for Windows on your system.

SAPforms form task


SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Task with which the method PROCESS of the object type FORM is executed. The various SAPforms form tasks can be distinguished according to: Task container Task description Agent assignment If a SAPforms form task is executed as a step in a workflow, the recipients of this step see a work item in their Business Workplaces. If the relevant system settings have been made, a mail is also sent to their Internet addresses. This mail contains the data from the task container as an R3F attachment.

SAPlpd

41

SAPmail
Retail (ISR)
Electronic mail system in SAPoffice with which you can transmit messages.

SAPoffice
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
Electronic mail and folder system in R/3. You use the mail system to send documents internally (to other R/3 users in the same system), or externally (to users in other systems). You use the folder system to manage documents in folders. A distinction is made between private and shared folders. You can create documents either in an SAP editor or in any other suitable PC editor. You can also attach files to documents.

sappfar
Client/Server Technology (BCCST)
Program for checking the profile parameters. Call: sappfpar check pf=<profile> Any configuration errors, bottlenecks, etc. are output. Lack of swap space often causes problems in this area. sappfpar checks this.

SAPphone
Email, Fax, and Telephony Interfaces (BCSRVCOM)
Interface for telephone integration in the R/3 System. Third party vendors can connect their telephony software to the R/3 System via SAPphone. SAPphone provides services for integrating the telephony functions in R/3 applications.

SAProuter

42

Network Interface, SAProuter (BCCSTNI)


SAP program that acts as part of a firewall system. The SAProuter simplifies network security and the routing of traffic to and from the R/3 System. It also establishes an indirect connection between the R/3 network and external networks. You can define which connections are allowed, which are not allowed, and which are protected by password access.

SAPscript
SAPscript (BCSRVSCR)
R/3 text management and form printing tool. SAPscript consists of five components: an editor for entering and editing text styles and forms for designing the print layout a composer as the central module for output formatting a programming interface that allows you to integrate SAPscript components in your own application programs and program the output via forms various database tables for storing texts, styles, and forms

SAPShow
SAP Knowledge Warehouse (BCDOCIWB)
A PC application of the SAP Knowledge Warehouse for displaying offline presentations of training courses.

SAPterm
Terminology/Glossary (BCDOCTER)
SAP terminology database.

sash
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Element of the user menu. You use the sash to change the relative height of the application area list and task list. To do this, you click anywhere on the sash and drag.

43

Save
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Standard function in the R/3 System. You use this function to save entered data in the database. Before saving the data, the system performs consistency checks. If an error occurs, the data is not saved, but displayed for correction.

save as complete
Invoice Verification (MMIV)
Function that creates an invoice document in document parking and saves the data to the database. Before saving the data, the system performs consistency checks. If errors occur, the system does not save the data, but presents it for correction. You can use 'Save as complete' if No more changes are to be made to the invoice document The balance of the invoice document is zero The invoice document is to be flagged for posting, but is not to be posted yet The following updates take place: Document changes Informative PO history Data for advance tax returns Index for duplicate invoice check Vendor open items PO commitments CO documents You can change, delete, and post invoice documents that have been saved as complete.

save set
Database Interface, Database Platforms (BCDB)
Dataset containing data backed up from the Informix database. A save set is created by ONArchive or the storage manager for ONBar during a database backup, archive, or logicallog backup. Save sets contain items such as logicallog files or dbspaces, which are identified by saveset ids.

44

save window
Database Interface, Database Platforms (BCDB)
Amount of time your R/3 System can be unavailable to users while you perform your save operation.

Save without check


Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Standard function in R/3. You use this function to save entered data for further processing. In this case, the system does not perform consistency checks and existing data is not updated.

savings made in the cost of living


Travel Management (FITV)
The cost of living savings are calculated at 1/5 of the actual expenses for meals. They are needed to calculate the additional expenses for meals.

scale
Retail (ISR)
Schema which determines a particular price, surcharge or discount or another condition depending on values, quantities, volumes, weight or points.

scale
Graphic (BCFESGRA)
The class CL_CU_SCALE defines the appearance of time intervals.

scale
Personnel Development (PAPD)
A means of grading proficiencies. You use scales to rate qualifications, for example, or appraisal elements. There are two different types of scale in the system: quality scales and quantity scales. 45

scale base type


Sales and Distribution (SD)
Code that defines how the system interprets the pricing scale of a condition. Depending on the scale base type, the scale can be a value, quantity, weight or volume scale.

scale base value


Sales and Distribution (SD)
Value or quantity which the system uses to access a scale in order to determine a scale level. The scale base value is often the value or quantity which has been entered in the document. Other arrangements are possible, however.

scale level
Logistics Execution (LE)
Part of a scale that is made up of different elements and a calculation type (absolute, relative, proportional) that controls how the condition rate is to be interpreted in the condition record. Examples of these elements might be a postal code in a postal code scale or a distance in a distance scale.

scale price
Contract Billing (ISUBI)
Price used for valuating the total quantity with the price from the last interval.

scale rate
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Rate which is defined for a particular level of a scale in a condition record. The scale rate is used in pricing in combination with the scale value to calculate the condition value for a document item. Example: Condition record: PR00 Up to the scale value 10 pieces, the scale rate is 12 USD per piece. As from the scale value 10 pieces, the scale rate is 10 USD per piece. During pricing for a sales order item with the quantity 11 pieces, the price is calculated as follows: Scale value: 11 pieces Scale rate: 10 USD per piece Condition value = 11 pcs * 10 USD = 110 USD 46

scale type
Logistics Execution (LE)
Indicator that controls how scales are weighted. The scale type specifies whether the scale values that were entered define the upper or lower limit for the scale: From a certain value, such as weight, upwards (base scale) Up to a certain value, such as weight (toscale) For exactly one value, such as postal code (equal scale)

scale type
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Key that defines whether the specified scale values represent the minimum or the maximum value for the price, discount, or surcharge concerned. The system distinguishes between the following two scale types: fromscale toscale A fromscale means that the specified scale price, discount or surcharge applies if a particular value or quantity is reached or exceeded. The following is an example for a fromscale: "A discount of ... is granted if 10 or more pieces are ordered".

scale unit
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Unit of measure to which a quantity scale refers.

scale value
Sales and Distribution (SD)
A value within a scale from which a price, surcharge, discount or another condition is granted. Example: For more than 10 pieces, a discount of 5% is granted. The 10 pieces are referred to as a scale value. The 5% is the scale rate.

47

scaling
Contract Billing (ISUBI)
Certain consecutive quantity areas for demand or energy. When one quantity area is exceeded, a different price applies to the total quantity. In this way, higher consumption can be cheaper than lower consumption.

scanner
SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Device used to convert texts, images or other information stored on paper or film into pixelbased raster graphics and subsequently into bit patterns. This procedure (digitalization) is a precondition for documents to be displayed or exported.

scanning
Retail (ISR)
Process in which an electronic data reading device reads the barcode of a material to register the movement of the material through the cash register.

scenario
AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Model type in the R/3 Reference Model. A scenario is a pattern for a business process. The EPC of a scenario shows the sequential and logical relationships between the processes that belong to the scenario.

scenario
AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Element of the SAP Reference Structure. A scenario shows a comprehensive business flow as a series of different individual processes that are linked sequentially and logically. An eventdriven process chain is used to portray a scenario.

scenario

48

CrossApplication Components (CA)


Description of a particular internal service request in Customizing. The following are examples of what you can store in the scenario: A descriptive short and long text For cost incurring scenarios: Rules for calculating incurred costs The entry type for the request and ITS service The fields or characteristics that are later displayed on the request form The tasks that are triggered by this request

scenario group
Compensation Management (PACM)
Scenario groups give you the opportunity to modularize the personnel costing calculations contained in plan scenarios. You can use scenario groups to divide a plan scenario into separate, selfcontained calculations. Each scenario group represents a certain area of your company. You choose which areas are included in a scenario group according to organizational unit.

schedule
Energy Data Management (ISUEDM)
Contractual agreement on energy supply made between two companies.

schedule
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Group of radioactive substances and objects in the ADR. The more radioactive the substance and thus the more dangerous the material, the higher the schedule number.

schedule
Training and Event Management (PE)
The time schedule or timetable of a business event. A schedule consists of the day schedules for the individual days of the event. Each day schedule is assigned a day segment consisting of up to three separate time blocks. You can use the time schedule you define as a schedule model and assign it to a business event type.

49

When you create business event dates, the schedule model is proposed as the actual schedule of the event. You can adopt the schedule model or define a new one as required. Example: Schedule '3 DAY' Day schedule...Day segment...Time blocks 001...........DAY..............08:0010:00/10:30 13:00/14:30 17:00 002...........DAY..............08:0010:00/10:30 13:00/14:30 17:00 003...........MORNING..........09:0012:00

Schedule
Training and Event Management (PE)
An infotype defining the time schedule of a business event. When a business event is created, you can create the schedule by copying the schedule model of the corresponding business event type, or by defining a specific schedule for the business event. The schedule contains the following: Day number with date, start and end time, and flag indicating days off Duration in days Duration in hours Number of dates Start day

schedule line
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Subdivision, according to date and quantity, of an item in a sales document. For example, if the total quantity of an item can only be delivered in four partial deliveries, the system creates four schedule lines and determines the appropriate quantities and delivery dates for each schedule line.

schedule line category


Sales and Distribution (SD)
Indicator that allows each schedule line to be controlled differently. The schedule line category influences how such functions as inventory management, material requirements planning and availability check are carried out for each schedule line.

50

schedule line in purchasing document


Purchasing (MMPUR)
Line of a time schedule for the successive delivery of parts of the total quantity of a material included as an item of a purchasing document (such as a purchase requisition, purchase order, or scheduling agreement). A schedule line specifies the individual quantity to be delivered, as well as the exact date, and possibly time, of delivery.

schedule line in requirements plan


Production Planning (PPMP)
A particular line in a requirements plan containing exactly one requirement quantity and one requirement date. The quantity obtained by adding together all the schedule line quantities results in the requirements plan. One schedule line corresponds to one planned independent requirement.

schedule line type


Purchasing (MMPUR)
In delivery schedules created under scheduling agreements, the following schedule line types are possible: backlog, immediate requirement, and forecast. Examples of schedule line types: You purchase the material Steel 01 from Miller Corp. using a scheduling agreement previously set up with this vendor. BACKLOG Your scheduling agreement release dated 05.20 contains the following schedule lines: Date Quantity 05.20.1999 10 kg 05.21.1999 20 kg Since today is 05.21.1999 and your vendor has not yet delivered the quantity required on 05.20, the latter quantity represents a backlog, (a pastdue requirement). IMMEDIATE REQUIREMENT According to the current overall delivery schedule for the scheduling agreement, instead of the 20 kg shown in the last SA release (above), you now require a total of 200 kg of Steel 01 today. You therefore create a further 51

schedule line for 180 kg for transmission to the vendor. Since you have not yet transmitted this additional requirement to your vendor, the 180 kg represents an immediate requirement. The remaining 20 kg still constitute a backlog. FORECAST According to the current overall delivery schedule for the scheduling agreement, you need 300 kg of Steel 01 on each of the dates 05.22, 05.25, and 05.28. Since today is 05.21, and the dates on which these quantities are required lie in the future, the schedule line type in these cases is "forecast" (that is to say, these are anticipated future requirements).

Schedule Manager
General Application Functions (CAGTF)
Uses extensive automation to enable, or simplify the definition, scheduling, execution and control of periodically recurring tasks, such as, periodend closing.

schedule model
Training and Event Management (PE)
An infotype containing information regarding the time schedule of a business event type. When a business event is created or planned, the schedule of the business event is copied from the schedule model defined for the business event type. Depending on the type of schedule model involved, it can contain the following information: Schedule with pattern Schedule without pattern Userdefined schedule Day number with start time and end time Duration in days Duration in hours Number of dates Start day

schedule record
Portioning and Scheduling (ISUBFPS)
Data record in which individual dates are managed, such as meter reading dates, billing dates, and budget billing amount due dates.

52

scheduled activity
Controlling (CO)
Quantity of a specific activity planned as input at the receivers.

scheduled billing period


Contract Billing (ISUBI)
Planned billing period, in which billing is to be performed. The scheduled billing period is defined in scheduling. The following periods can be defined in scheduling: monthly quarterly annually etc.

scheduled dates
Project System (PS)
Activity dates, which are determined in scheduling. Using the minimum/maximum logic, they can be copied into the network header or into the WBS element.

scheduled finish date


Production Planning and Control (PP)
Planned finish date of an order without the float after production.

scheduled meter reading category


Meter Reading (ISUDMMR)
Entry made during meter reading order creation that determines the type of meter reading order output (reading by the customer or by the utility) or whether the meter reading is to be estimated. You enter the scheduled meter reading category in the schedule record.

scheduled start date

53

Production Planning and Control (PP)


Planned start date of an order without the float before production.

scheduler
Warehouse Management (BWWHM)
With the aid of the scheduler you determine which data (transaction data, master data, texts or hierarchies) is to be requested and updated from which InfoSource, DataSource and source system and at which point in time.

scheduler
General Application Functions (CAGTF)
A component of the Schedule Manager used to schedule tasks. One component of the scheduler is the task list, which contains the tasks to be scheduled. The tasks must be created before the scheduler can be used.

scheduling
IndustrySpecific Component for Hospitals (ISH)
Scheduling of the admission of a patient at a future date and time.

scheduling
Portioning and Scheduling (ISUBFPS)
Planning and controlling of the following functions: Meter reading order creation Billing Determination of budget billing amount due dates

scheduling
Production Planning and Control (PP)
In scheduling, the system calculates the start and finish dates of orders or of operations within an order. Scheduling is carried out in Material requirements planning: The inhouse production times and the delivery times specified in the material master record are taken into account. Capacity planning: Scheduling is carried out using routings. A distinction is made between lead time scheduling, in which capacity loads are not taken into account, and finite scheduling in which capacity 54

loads are taken into account. Networks: Scheduling calculates the earliest and latest dates for the execution of the activities as well as the capacity requirements and the floats. The following scheduling types exist: Forward scheduling: scheduling starting from the start date Backward scheduling: scheduling starting from the finish date Scheduling to current date: scheduling starting from the current date "Today" scheduling: a scheduling type which can be used to reschedule an order if the start date is in the past.

scheduling
(CRMFSP)
System function that determines the start and end time for a service assignment. Scheduling is based on the start and end time and estimated duration of a service task, taking availability information for the service employee into account. Scheduling can be performed manually by the resource planner for the service center, or be executed by the system according to certain specifications.

scheduling
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
The main objectives of the scheduling function of ISOil downstream are as follows: Group deliveries into shipments Assign shipments to an appropriate vehicle Optimize grouping of deliveries and shipment processing with respect to cost, efficiency and customer service.

scheduling agreement
Purchasing (MMPUR)
Outline agreement on the basis of which materials are procured at a series of predefined points in time over a certain period.

scheduling agreement
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
Outline purchase agreement against which materials are procured on specified dates within a certain timeframe. In the Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) a distinction is made between the following types of scheduling agreement: 55

APO scheduling agreement The delivery schedule lines for an APO scheduling agreement are planned in the APO system. OLTP scheduling agreement The delivery schedule lines for an OLTP scheduling agreement are generated in the OLTP system.

scheduling agreement delivery schedule


Purchasing (MMPUR)
Timescale for the successive delivery of parts of the total quantity of a material included as an item of a scheduling agreement (a form of "outline agreement", or longerterm purchasing arrangement). Such schedules are sometimes termed "rolling schedules" because they are periodically updated.

scheduling agreement delivery schedule line


Purchasing (MMPUR)
Line of a time schedule for the successive delivery of parts of the total quantity of a material included as an item of a scheduling agreement (a form of "outline agreement", or longerterm purchasing arrangement). A schedule line specifies the individual quantity to be delivered, as well as the exact date, and possibly time, of delivery.

scheduling agreement release


Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
Document consisting essentially of a schedule informing the vendor which quantities of a product are to be delivered on which date (and in some cases at which time). You use a scheduling agreement release to record the current status of the overall delivery schedule for a scheduling agreement item in the system and transmit this information to the vendor. The following types of scheduling agreement (SA) release are available in APO: Operative delivery schedules Forecast/planning delivery schedules

scheduling agreement release


Sales and Distribution (SD)
Document sent in by the customer to request delivery from the component supplier of a portion of the total quantity of materials set out in the scheduling agreement. 56

The following scheduling agreement releases are defined in the SAP system: Forecast delivery schedule Justintime (JIT) delivery schedule Sequenced delivery schedule Planning delivery schedule

scheduling agreement release


Purchasing (MMPUR)
Document by means of which a customer requests (or indicates his intention to request) delivery by the vendor of part of the total quantity of materials covered by a scheduling agreement as and when such delivery is required. The following scheduling agreement releases are defined in the SAP System: Forecast delivery schedule (FRC schedule) JIT delivery schedule (JIT schedule) Sequenced delivery schedule (SEQ schedule) If you use both JIT schedules and forecast schedules, the former are the ones against which deliveries are actually to be effected, the latter being a more tentative indication of likely future requirements. If you use forecast schedules only, these are then the schedules against which the vendor is actually to deliver. The terminology used in the Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) is slightly different to that used in the standard system: The "operative delivery schedule" (APO) corresponds to the "JIT schedule" (standard), and the "forecast/planning schedule" (APO) corresponds to the "forecast delivery schedule" (standard).

scheduling agreement with release


Sales and Distribution (SD)
A scheduling agreement which covers the customer purchasing order and for which individual forecast delivery schedules or JIT delivery schedules come in from the customer either by fax or by computer at a specific time.

scheduling margin key


Material Requirements Planning (PPMRP)
Indicator in the material master record that refers to a group of time intervals that are relevant to material requirements planning.

scheduling period

57

Plant Maintenance (PM)


Period of time, for which the system creates maintenance calls when scheduling a maintenance plan. The scheduling period can be specified in days, months and years. Example: When scheduling a maintenance plan, for which calls are to be created for a whole year, the scheduling period must be 365 days long.

scheduling strategy
(CRMFSP)
Describes how scheduling should be performed in the resource planning tool. There are two different scheduling strategies: The user determines the start and end time of an assignment. After a start or end date has been set, the system determines a suitable start or end time with reference to the employee time stream.

scheduling type
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Indicates that shows how the maintenance due date was generated. There are four scheduling types: new start scheduled manual call start within the current cycle

scheduling work center


Flow Manufacturing (PPFLW)
Work center that is used for scheduling and capacity planning in flow and repetitive manufacturing. If you have not defined a line hierarchy, the production line itself is the scheduling work center. If you have maintained a line hierarchy for a production line, you define a work center in the line hierarchy as a scheduling work center. This term is used in Line Design.

58

schema
Contract Billing (ISUBI)
Structure that defines the sequence in which variant programs (calculation/processing steps) must be executed.

schema step
Contract Billing (ISUBI)
Single component (variant program) of a schema.

scope
Customizing (BCCUS)
The breadth of the project based on business drivers, objectives, existing IT environment, time and cost restrictions, etc. The scope defines which R/3 functions and processes will be part of the project.

scope
AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
In ASAP, the scope identifies the business boundaries of what is to be implemented in the way of R/3 functionality. 80% of this is defined in the Baseline scope.

Scope Document
AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
New document in Release 4.5B, which replaces the Enterprise Area Scope Document. Contains not only processes, but also new structure elements incorporated into the Q&Adb in Release 4.5B, such as "Master Data" or "CrossApplication Components".

scope of check
Global AvailableToPromise (APOATP)
A group of categories that should be included in the check control (ATP group and business event) in the product availability check. The scope of check is configured in APO Customizing.

59

score
Corporate Performance Monitor (SEMCPM)
Mapping of one or more key figure values to a userdefined scale in order to determine the degree to which the enterprise objectives have been reached. In the Balanced Scorecard, a status is determined for different element types. This status provides information on whether the enterprise objectives have been reached for the respective subarea and to what extent. The status is read from a userdefined scale. Each step of this scale is mapped to a value range. Due to the fact that several key figure values may be included when determining the status of an objective, these have to be transformed to a single value (the result value) first, before the value that was calculated this way is compared with value ranges of the status scale. The result value can be identical with a measure. However, as a rule, it differs.

score
Corporate Performance Monitor (SEMCPM)
Mapping of one or more key figure values to a userdefined scale in order to determine the degree to which the enterprise objectives have been reached. In the Balanced Scorecard, a status is determined for different element types. This status provides information on whether the enterprise objectives have been reached for the respective subarea and to what extent. The status is read from a userdefined scale. Each step of this scale is mapped to a value range. Due to the fact that several key figure values may be included when determining the status of an objective, these have to be transformed to a single value (the result value) first, before the value that was calculated this way is compared with value ranges of the status scale. The result value can be identical with a measure. However, as a rule, it differs.

score
Supply Chain Cockpit (SCC) (APOSCC)
Result of the computation of production planning performance data. The production plan created in PP/DS can be evaluated in the Plan Analyzer using a table of key figures such as setup times or stock levels. The key figures are evaluated by a point system which results in a total score derived either by adding up the individual points or by using a formula.

score
Purchasing (MMPUR)
Result of the computation of performance data in respect of main or subcriteria for vendor evaluation purposes. In vendor evaluation, a vendor's overall score is determined as follows: 60

The system multiplies the scores attained in respect of the main criteria by weighting factors (expressed as percentages) defined by the user. The results are added together and the result of the addition is divided by the number of main criteria. This result is then divided by the maximum weighting factor. The end result is the vendor's overall score.

scoring method
Purchasing (MMPUR)
In vendor evaluation, a way of determining scores for subcriteria. There are three ways of scoring, after which the subcriteria are named: Manual scoring method: The user enters a vendor's score for a subcriterion. The system takes this score into account in computing the score for the relevant main criterion. Semiautomatic scoring method: Here there are two possibilities. The user enters: Several scores for a subcriterion relating to various materials at info record level Scores for quality and timeliness of service performance at the time of service entry From these, the system computes the score awarded to the vendor for the subcriterion. Automatic scoring method: Here the user does not enter anything. Instead, the system computes the score for the subcriterion from data entered at another point in the enterprise (from data entered by the goods receiving department for example).

scoring range
Purchasing (MMPUR)
Scale ranging from the worst to the best score a vendor can attain. You need a scoring range to be able to compare a certain vendor's performance with that of others. You can determine the scoring range yourself.

scrap
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Percentage of a material which does not meet quality requirements.

61

scrap
Quality Management (QM)
Nonconforming product that will not fulfill the quality requirements even after rework and that cannot be used for other purposes.

scrap level
Cable Solution (CAB)
An economic specification limit. If a cable falls below this value (that is, if it is too short), it is recommended for scrapping.

scrap rate
Specification 2000 (ISADSPC)
Percentage (to one decimal place) of units of a given part classified as repairable which when removed from service are found to be beyond economic repair and are therefore scrapped.

scrap value
Asset Accounting (FIAA)
A part of an asset's value that is not depreciated. You can use one of these methods for scrap value (memo value): Deduct the scrap value from the base depreciation value before the start of depreciation calculation. Define the scrap value as a fixed value at which depreciation is stopped (cutoff value). You define the scrap value either as a set amount or as a percentage of APC.

scrap variance
Product Cost Controlling (COPC)
Value of the unplanned scrap quantities. The scrap variance is calculated by valuating the unplanned scrap quantities with the target costs less the planned scrap costs. The unplanned scrap quantity is the difference between an operation's actual scrap quantity and its target scrap quantity.

scrapping

62

Inventory Management (MMIM)


Posting in the inventory management system, made if a material can no longer be used. This occurs, for example, if a material has deteriorated in quality or become obsolete due to having been kept in storage for too long. Both the intentional and unintentional destruction of a material also have to be posted in the system as "scrapping".

screen
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Primary window of a session.

screen
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Screen in the sense of a DYNamic PROgram ("Dynpro" in German). A screen consists of a screen image and its underlying flow logic. The main components of a screen are: Attributes (for example, screen number, next screen) Layout (the arrangement of texts, fields, and other elements) Element attributes (definitions of the properties of individual elements) Flow logic (calls of the relevant ABAP modules)

screen attribute
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Property of a screen. Screen attributes describe a screen. The handling of a screen depends on the screen attribute values you specify. Screen attributes include: Screen number Next screen (the next screen to be displayed during the transaction) Cursor position (element on which the cursor is placed when the screen is first displayed) Screen group (fourcharacter ID of a group of related screens) Lines/columns (Size of the area occupied by screen elements)

63

screen configuration tool


IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
The Screen Configuration Tool (SCT) is used to configure the MRN (Marketing Retail Network) location master transaction for each installation. The screen can be used to: enable and disenable the location master record screens for each location type, create screens based on a number of predefined subscreens and scecify the field setting on the data section subscreens.

screen element
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Screen object. In the Screen Painter, the following screen elements are available: Text elements Input/output fields Checkboxes Radio buttons Pushbuttons Group boxes Subscreens Table controls Tabstrip controls Custom controls Status icons You define screen elements either in the ABAP Dictionary or in the program.

screen exit
Customer Enhancements (BCDWBCEX)
Predefined area in the SAP standard reserved for customerspecific subscreens. Screen exits refer to areas of a main screen reserved by SAP developers for customers to design their own screens as customer exits.

screen group
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Screen attribute. A screen group is a group of related screens identified by a fourcharacter ID.

64

screen ID
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Unique identification of a screen. The screen ID consists of an 8character program name (the name of the program to which the screen is assigned) and a 4digit screen number.

screen layout rule


Asset Accounting (FIAA)
A group of settings that specifies which fields are displayed during master data maintenance whether entries have to be made (required entry fields) in these fields or not (optional entry fields).

screen number
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Number that identifies a screen within an ABAP program. A screen number consists of up to four digits.

screen order
Logistics General (LO)
When the material master is configured in Customizing for the Material Master , this is the order in which the main screens appear in the Select View(s) dialog box when subsequently maintaining material master records. It is also the order in which main screens and additional screens appear as tab pages.

Screen Painter
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Tool for creating the screens of a dialog transaction. In the Screen Painter, you define the graphical layout of the screen as well as the underlying flow logic. The layout editor of the Screen Painter can run in two different modes: alphanumeric mode graphical mode 65

Although both modes offer the same functions, they have different interfaces.

screen processor
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Component that executes the screen flow logic of application programs. The screen processor controls the communication between work process and SAP GUI, calls processing logic modules and transfers field contents to the processing logic.

screen sequence
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Concatenation of several screens in a logical sequence. Screen sequences are often required to process business tasks.

screen sequence
ABAP Workbench (BCDWB)
Concatenation of several screens in a logical sequence. To process a business task, you often have to process several screens one after the other.

screen sequence
Logistics Basic Data (LOMD)
When the material master is configured in Customizing for the Material Master , you can group data screens together to form a screen sequence. This screen sequence can be assigned to a combination of transactions, users, material types, and industry sectors. As a result, this screen sequence appears automatically for the respective user(s) when the transaction, material type, or industry sector is chosen.

screen type
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Type of screen. In the Screen Painter, you can define the following screen types: Normal Selection screen Modal dialog box 66

Selection screen as modal dialog box Subscreen

screen variant
Financial Accounting (FI)
Determines which fields for input are displayed on a data entry screen (during fast entry of documents, for example).

screen variant
Controlling (CO)
Determines which entry fields are displayed during entry of the following actual data: Manual cost repostings Manual revenue repostings Direct activity allocations Statistical key figures Manual cost allocation

screen variant
Customer Enhancements (BCDWBCEX)
Tool to personalize applications. Screens can be simplified by: Preassigning values to fields Hiding and changing the readyforinput status of fields Hiding and changing the properties of table control columns A screen variant contains field values and properties for a single screen. It is possible to assign screen variants to transaction variants.

screening inspection
Quality Management (QM)
100% inspection, where all nonconforming units are rejected. The relationship between the nonconforming units found during a screening inspection and the nonconforming units found during a sampling inspection of the lot is called the degree of screening effectiveness. In general, the smaller the share of nonconforming units found before the screening inspection (that is, during the lot inspection), the lower the degree of screening effectiveness.

67

screenshot
Knowledge Warehouse (KMKW)
The iTutor Recorder records two screenshots for each step: one before and one after performing an interaction. The author defines which of the two screenshots is displayed in the iTutor Player.

script
Customer Service (CS)
Text created in SAPscript for reminder scripting. It can be fully customized and can include variables.

script
(CRMMT)
The Visual Basic code written to define the behavior of an interaction component. For example, event handler and method.

scripting
Telecommunications industry (IST)
Support for CSR in a call center that defines the sequence of questions during sales negotiations for a specific business transaction or product.

scroll arrow
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Graphical control element. Scroll arrows are located at each end of a scroll bar. By clicking on a scroll arrow, you can move the display forwards or backwards by line or by column.

scroll bar
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Graphical control element. The scroll bar offers a range of scrolling options (such as absolute relative scrolling, both forwards and backwards). It extends along the entire length of an object to be scrolled, either vertically to the right of the 68

object, or horizontally directly under the object. You operate the scroll bar with the mouse.

scroll bar shaft


Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Graphical control element. The scroll bar shaft is a component of the scroll bar. It extends across the entire scrollable area.

scrollable
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Element attribute in the Screen Painter that sets the scroll function. This attribute is used whenever the defined length of a field exceeds the visible length.

SDK
Business Navigator (BCCUSTOLNAV)
Software Development Kit

search engine
(WP)
On the Internet, a search engine has three parts: A spider (also called a "crawler" or a "bot") that goes to every page or representative pages on every Web site that wants to be searchable and reads it, using hypertext links on each page to discover and read a site's other pages A program that creates a huge index (sometimes called a "catalog") from the pages that have been read A program that receives your search request, compares it to the entries in the index, and returns results to you Examples of search engines on the World Wide Web include Altavista, Lycos, and Yahoo.

search engine
Industry Solution Telecommunications (IST)
A function that systematically searches for equipment in the network or in the warehouse stock. It also reserves equipment for service orders. 69

The search has several steps that can be freely defined. This means that the search results can be tailored to match a specific requirements profile.

search field
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Field whose possible input values are sought in the input help process.

search for free times


Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
Search function that searches the appointment calendar of one or more users for free time periods for an appointment.

search help
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Object in the ABAP Dictionary. Search help is used to define possible entries help (F4) for screen fields.

search help attachment


ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Method by which a search help is linked to a field. The search help attachment can be by data element, table field, the check table or screen.

search help exit


ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Function module assigned to a search help. You can use search help exits to adapt the standard flow of the possible entries help process to specific requirements.

search help inclusion

70

ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)


Process which links one search help to another search help.

search help parameter


ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Parameters that form the interface between the search help and the screen.

search request
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
Definition of search terms. Specification of one or more search criteria, which can be linked and used to search a set of folders for specific objects.

search result
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
Results of a search. List displaying all documents which meet the search criteria specified in the search request.

season
Retail (ISR)
Reporting period in which a special assortment limited to a specific period is merchandised and maintained in the information system in a particular way (e.g. summer season, Christmas season, Easter season, winter season).

season
Contract Billing (ISUBI)
Division of a year into fixed periods that do not overlap and that add up to exactly one year. Separate conditions apply to each period, which are taken into account in billing. Example: Different prices apply to the winter and summer seasons: Winter season, 10/1 3/31: $0.21 per kWh 71

Summer season, 4/1 9/30: $0.15 per kWh

season processing
Sales and Distribution (ISAFSSD)
A parallel or overlapping processing in the apparel and footwear industry of various collections (for various seasons or lines). This process involves very large data quantities that belong to different seasons. They must, however, be managed at the same time and assigned to the corresponding seasons. Example: The introduction of the Fall/Winter Collection 99 for the time period January/February 1999 includes the requirements planning and the order entry. During the same time period, the Spring/Summer collection 99 is produced and delivered. In addition, the planning and developing for the Fall/Winter Collection 2000 are carried out.

season table season windup


Retail (ISR)
Seasonal goods are flagged with a deletion indicator, thus enabling them to be reassigned at the end of a season.

seasonal index
Production Planning (PPMP)
Index with which the system determines and updates the seasonal percentage of the forecast value, if a seasonal model or a seasonal trend model is used to calculate the forecast.

seasonal material
Retail (ISR)
Onetime material which is managed once only, within a fixed period of time, such as fashion for the spring/summer season 2001.

seasonal model
Production Planning (PPMP)
Model which is used if the consumption flow represents a seasonal cycle.

72

If periodically recurring peak or low values which differ significantly from a stable mean value are observed, then a seasonal model exists.

seasonal trend model


Production Planning (PPMP)
Model used for a seasonal trend consumption pattern. A seasonal trend consumption flow is characterized by a continual increase or decrease of the mean value.

second program grouping


Benefits (PABN)
A means of identifying a group of employees with common characteristics for the purpose of determining on a high level the program of benefit plans available for that group (macroeligibility). Employees are sorted dynamically into second program groupings during processing, according to the corresponding feature.

secondary BOM
Production Planning and Control (PP)
BOM whose item data is compared to that of the primary BOM.

secondary compensating products


Foreign Trade (SDFT)
Product in the category of inward and outward processing or anything else that is not included in primary customs processing.

secondary cost element


Controlling (CO)
Cost element that is used to allocate costs for internal activities. Secondary cost elements do not correspond to any G/L account in Financial Accounting. They are only used in Controlling and consequently cannot be defined in FI as an account.

secondary costs
73

Controlling (CO)
Cost elements that represent the activity values produced during internal cost allocations.

secondary fixed cost variance


Cost Center Accounting (COOMCCA)
Difference between the fixed plan costs and the fixed target costs. Only occurs when activitydependent activity inputs are made for a cost center or business process. A portion of the fixed target costs (variable target quantity x fixed price) varies with the operating rate.

secondary index
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Index created in addition to the primary index of a table. When you activate a table in the ABAP Dictionary, an index is created automatically on the primary key fields of the table. Further indexes created for the table are called secondary indexes.

secondary method
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Method that is executed in addition to the main method in the execution of a dialog work item or a background work item. A secondary method is connected to the leading method of the step, and is generally used to display additional information. The secondary method can be any object method defined in the Business Object Repository. If the work item is executed several times (say, for example, the terminating event has not yet occurred), the secondary method is also executed several times.

secondary product
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
The secondary product is either NGL (natural gas liquid) or residue.

74

secondary proportionality
Project System (PS)
Measurement technique used to determine the percentage of completion (POC) in progress analysis. With this technique, the performance of a project object is dependent upon the progress of another project object. Example: In a network there are two activities, "create engineering drawings" and "check drawings". A drawing is only complete once it has been checked. The percentage of completion for the activity "check drawings" is taken from the activity "create engineering drawings" when you use this measurement technique.

secondary resource
Production Planning for Process Industries (PPPI)
Resource that is required besides the primary resource and can be assigned to an operation or a phase (such as an operator or a transportation container). These secondary resources can be assigned a start/finish time that is relative to the start/finish time of the operation or phase (time offset).

secondary screen
Logistics Basic Data (LOMD)
Material master screen that can be accessed either as an additional screen or by pushbutton.

secondary table
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Table in an aggregated object that has a (transitive) foreign key relationship to the primary table of the object.

secondary tax card


Payroll (PY)
Special tax card used when the employee has more employers (secondary employer).

75

secondary wage type


Payroll (PY)
Wage type that is created by the system during the payroll run or derived from specific factors. The technical name of secondary wage types delivered by SAP starts with "/". Example: Secondary wage type total gross amount (/101). This wage type, within which all of the wage types pertaining to an employee's total gross amount are cumulated, is created during the payroll run.

secondary window
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Subordinate window. Secondary windows are always linked to a primary window. You can only generate them from a primary window or another secondary window. In secondary windows, you perform peripheral processing such as handling supplementary data that is needed only in exceptional cases. The R/3 System contains a special type of secondary window known as a dialog box.

secondlevel report
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
Report for secondlevel pricing analysis which displays formula and average pricing data. The secondlevel report provides detailed analysis of the formula which determines the value of a condition record. The analysis can be displayed for different levels of the formula: formula evaluation, A Term evaluation, B Term evaluation and term item evaluation.

secret key encryption


Application Components (SAP)
A cryptographic system in which the same key is used to encipher a message, and then decipher the resulting ciphertext.

76

section
Special Purpose Ledger (FISL)
An independent block within a report definition. A section consists of one or more physical rows and columns, which form a logical unit within a Report Painter report.

section
Advertising Management (ISMAM)
Characteristic that describes different work areas or areas of responsibility in newspapers and magazines. Work areas in newspapers and magazines include sections such as Politics, Economy, Culture, Sport or Fashion. Content components of the section type are usually assigned to the first level of the content component hierarchy. Ads that are placed in content components of the section type are usually published in the editorial section. They are usually multicolor display ads.

Secure HypterText Transfer Protocol


Application Components (SAP)
A secure version of HTTP, providing general transaction security services over the Web.

Secure Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension


Application Components (SAP)
Internetstandard that defines a means to make email messages more secure by adding both digital signatures and encryption. Using S/MIMEcompliant email packages, users can make sure that a message in fact comes from the supposed sender (thanks to the signature), and that no one else could read the message before it arrived (thanks to encryption).

Secure Network Communication


Security (BCSEC)
Interface that allows R/3 to communicate with an external security product to protect the communication links between the components of an R/3 System. The features of the security product can be implemented in addition to the standard functions provided by R/3.

77

Secure Sockets Layer


Security (BCSEC)
Internet standard protocol developed by Netscape that is used to secure communications across the Internet. The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol layer exists between the networklayer protocol (for example, TCP/IP) and the application layer protocol (for example, HTTP). The protocol uses publickey technology to secure the communication between a client and a server. The SSL protocol provides for the following: Encrypted connections SSL server authentication SSL client authentication SSL mutual authentication (Both server and client authentication) To access Internet addresses that use SSL connections, you use URLs starting with HTTPS: instead of HTTP:. For more information, see: http://www.netscape.com/security/techbriefs/ssl.html http://developer.netscape.com/docs/manuals/security/sslin/contents.htm

secure storage area


Document Management System (CADMS)
Protected area of storage data for original application files of a document info record. For security reasons this area is not accessable from the file system from a frontend computer. You must first maintain a document info record in the Document Management System (DMS) in order to transport original application files into a secure or to process them later. You can use the following secure storage areas: SAP Database (part of the standard SAP System) Vault (defined in Customizing of DMS) Archive (SAP ArchiveLink 4.5 HTTP Content Server interface) Storage systems that are controlled using the ArchiveLink HTTP Content Server 4.5 HTTP Content Server interface such as: HTTP Content Server RFC Archive

78

Secure Store and Forward


Security (BCSEC)
Interface for secure data storage and transmission that allows the R/3 System to communicate with an external security product. In this way, digital signatures and digital envelopes can be used to protect data and documents as independent units as they are saved on data carriers or when transmitted over communication paths.

securities account
Treasury Management (TRTM)
Unit used for position management and valuation. A securities account is required for all financial transactions that require position management. Usually, a securities account in the system relates to an actual securities account at a bank.

securities account block


Treasury Management (TRTM)
The securities account block stops sales for complete securities accounts or individual classes per securities account. In the case of individual classes, the whole item or parts of it can be blocked. The block can be limited to a certain period after which the position is automatically released.

securities account statement


Treasury Management (TRTM)
Statement containing the planned and actual purchases and sales as well as the position trend per security, including changes to the acquisition and book values.

Security Audit Log


Security (BCSEC)
Log containing securityrelated system information such as configuration changes or unsuccessful logon attempts. This information is useful for monitoring changes to the R/3 System or for tracking a series of events.

security deposit

79

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (ISUCA)


Deposit which a business partner must give the utility company as a new business partner or as a business partner with poor creditworthiness. The following types of security deposits exist: Cash security deposit Noncash security deposit

security deposit transfer


Customer Service (ISUCS)
When a business partner relocates, a link is established between the old contract for the old address and the new contract for the new address. At the same time, any cash or noncash security deposits are automatically transferred from the old contract to the new contract.

segment
IDoc Interface (BCSRVEDI)
Structure which includes the application data for an IDoc from the data records. This helps to assign the data to the correct application fields.

segment
Archive Development Kit (BCCCMADK)
Name of the structure for the archiving object; used to tell ADK which tables are to be archived. See also: parent segment

segment
(CRMMW)
View of one or more database tables that contain details of a business object (or part of one) which is relevant for the method of the BDoc in which it is used. A segment is not only a collection of fields, it also contains information about table links. The R/3 structure derived from a segment contains some additional fields for the communication and administration.

segment adjustment

80

Cost Center Accounting (COOMCCA)


Adjustment of postings from previously closed periods in a period that is still open. A segment adjustment can be: A reversal of a segment A reversal of a segment followed by a segment rebook

Segment Builder
(CRMMKT)
An interactive marketing tool which provides a graphical interface for modeling target groups.

segment rebook
Cost Center Accounting (COOMCCA)
Occurs after a segment has been reversed to adjust postings made in previously closed periods. A segment rebook makes a new allocation for segments of a cycle in actual assessment or actual distribution in periods that are already closed. However, the adjusted results are posted in the current period, not in the period already closed.

segment rebook
Cost Center Accounting (COOMCCA)
Occurs after a segment has been reversed to adjust postings made in previously closed periods. A segment rebook makes a new allocation for segments of a cycle in actual assessment or actual distribution in periods that are already closed. However, the adjusted results are posted in the current period, not in the period already closed.

segment reversal
Cost Center Accounting (COOMCCA)
Function for cancelling segments of allocation cycles from actual assessment or distribution carried out in previously closed periods. Reversal takes place in the period of the reversal and does not change postings in the previous period.

segmentation category

81

(CRMMKT)
Describes the usage of an object within the Segment Builder. SAP supplies three categories as standard: target group, sample, and product proposal. Within each category, segmentation types can be created which function as subcategories.

segmentation type
(CRMMKT)
A subcategory of the standard segmentation categories target group, product proposal, and sample to which objects in the Segment Builder are assigned. Segmentation types are used to control display authorizations and as search criteria within the Segment Builder.

segregation
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Description of physical separation of dangerous goods and other goods (other dangerous goods in particular). Example Away from Not above

segregation key
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Regulationdependent grouping of dangerous goods according to similar properties.

select
Reporting (BCSRVREP)
To read a database table for the data which is to be displayed in a report.

Select
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Standard function in R/3. You use this function to select the object indicated by the cursor for further processing.

82

Select all
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Standard function in R/3. You use this function to select all objects in a list for further processing.

Select block
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Standard function in the R/3 System. You use this function to select blocks in a list or table. To select a block: Place the cursor on the first object in the block and choose "Select block". Place the cursor on the last object in the block and choose "Select block".

selected item
Consolidation (FILC)
The definition of selected financial statement items enables the system to automatically determine FS items when generating postings. Selected items are assigned to classification keys, up to three characters in length.

selected set
Quality Management (QM)
Selection of specific entries (code groups and codes) of a catalog. A selected set enables the user to choose only those code groups and codes of a catalog that are required or allowed for a specific purpose.

selection condition
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Condition that can be specified to restrict the set of data records selected with a view. In a selection condition, you can use relational operators to compare the contents of the view fields with constants. You can link several selection conditions using the logical operators AND and OR. 83

selection condition
Variant Configuration (LOVC)
Dependency type used to define that a value must be assigned to a characteristic, or a BOM component must be selected, if a specific value is assigned to a specific characteristic.

selection cover sheet


Print and Output Management (BCCCMPRN)
Cover sheet which lists the selection criteria of a program.

selection field
Customizing (BCCUS)
The selection field in a Project IMG is the field that stores the information as to whether a global or local activity is to be carried out. For each IMG activity, you can define as many selection fields as you wish. You can then use this field to group all activities belonging to a particular global template, for example.

selection horizon
Material Requirements Planning (PPMRP)
Period of time, to which the importing of MRP elements into the stock/requirements list can be restricted. The selection horizon is defined in the selection rule. It is either preset in Customizing or chosen on a userspecific basis by the user in the respective transaction.

selection indicator
Customizing (BCCUS)
You can define which sections of the procedure box you can display using the selection box. You can change the section by moving the selection box up, down, to the right or to the left.

selection log
Reporting (BCSRVREP)
Log which displays information about the data selection. The selection log can contain the following information: the characteristic values used to select the data 84

statistical data, such as the number of records the system read

selection method
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Part of a search help. The selection method describes the database object from which the data for the input help is read.

selection option
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
ABAP data type used to pass values to a report. The values are used in the report to check the contents of other data fields. The result of this check affects the program flow. Selection options are defined using the SELECTOPTIONS statement.

selection period
Basic Data (PPBD)
Part of the selection area in the Engineering Workbench. An object with a date effectivity is only copied into the worklist if it is effective on one of the days in the selection period.

selection profile
Mill Products (ISMP)
You can store search criteria in the selection profile. Selection profiles contain class types, classes, and characteristics. The valuation of the characteristics can be included in the selection profile.

selection range
Basic Data (PPBD)
Validity that a change status must have, for it to be copied to the Engineering Workbench worklist. It is made up of: The selection period A selection parameter variant (optional) The following applies in this case: a change status with Date validity is only copied to the worklist if it is valid on a day within the selection period. Parameter effectivity is only copied to the worklist if it fulfils the selection parameter variant. 85

selection rule
Material Requirements Planning (PPMRP)
Rule, consisting of a group of certain MRP elements and stocks, that controls the selection of this data in the stock/requirements list and the planning table for Repetitive Manufacturing: Only the MRP elements defined in the selection horizon are displayed for the period. Only the MRP elements that are selected in the selection rule are displayed. Of the MRP elements displayed, only those indicated as relevant for availability in the selection rule are used to calculate the quantity available and the ranges of coverage. Only the stocks defined in the selection rule are included in the calculation of the stock available. This forms a new business view of the data in the lists.

selection screen
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Automatically generated screen. The screen image and the underlying flow logic of a selection screen are generated from ABAP statements in the processing logic. Selection screens require the user to enter values that act as database selection criteria before starting an ABAP report program.

selection screen
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Automatically generated screen of an ABAP report. On the selection screen, you enter selection criteria, which is then used by the report to evaluate the database, generate a result list, and (sometimes) update the database.

selection screen version


ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Version of the standard selection screen of a logical database. Selection screen versions allow you to modify the selection screen of a logical database (if, for example, you want to suppress particular input fields from display). To define selection screen versions, you specify screen numbers in the selection include of the logical database, and then enter these numbers in the program attributes.

86

selection source
(CRMMKT)
Describes the origin (Business Information Warehouse, attribute sets, InfoSet queries and so on) of the data that can be used to specify selection criteria when modeling marketing profiles.

selection table
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Internal table in which selection criteria are stored. For each SELECTOPTIONS or RANGES statement in an ABAP report program, the system generates a selection table. The purpose of selection tables is to facilitate the storage of complex selections in a standardized way.

selection values
Basic Data (PPBD)
Parameter variant that you use in the Engineering Workbench to determine which parameter effectivity a change status has to have to be copied into the worklist. A change status that does not satisfy the selection value is not copied into the worklist.

selection variable
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Variable used to pass values to a program. You declare selection variables with the ABAP statement SELECTOPTIONS.

selection variant
Demand Planning (APOFCS)
String that uniquely defines a selection variant. In Demand Planning a selection variant consists of plannable characteristic value combinations and a demand planning version.

selection variant
Logistics General (LO)
A stored number of selection criteria. 87

Instead of entering selection criteria every time you start a particular report, you can enter them once and save them in the form of a selection variant. A report can have different variants allocated to it, with each variant providing a different set of information.

selection variant
Controlling (CO)
Used to select the master data of the following objects: Cost elements Cost centers Activity types Business processes Orders WBS elements One or more master data attributes are used in the selection process. You only need to enter the selection criteria once. The master data of the selected objects can be accessed using the selection variant.

selection variant
Basic Data (PPBD)
Summary of the selection criteria entered in the Engineering Workbench.Selection criterion that you frequently use when entering the Engineering Workbench can be saved as selection variants. From then on, it is only necessary to enter the name of the selection variant instead of the selection criterion.

SelfBilling Monitor
Inbound SelfBilling Procedure (ISASBI)
Function that consists of one status window and several lists. The status window displays all of the open transmissions of selfbilling documents, according to their status (waiting for processing, processed with errors, and so on). The user can click on the icons next to the numbers of transmissions to display a list of the transmissions that correspond to this status. Each of these lists also links to further, related lists.

selfpayer
IndustrySpecific Component for Hospitals (ISH)
Patient to whom hospital invoices are addressed directly or who makes direct payments to the hospital.

88

selfpayer insurance relationship


IndustrySpecific Component for Hospitals (ISH)
Type of insurance relationship of a patient in the area of patient accounting. If invoices are to be addressed directly to the patient, the insurance relationship of the patient is assigned to the patient him/herself as a selfpayer and not to an insurance provider. A selfpayer insurance relationship is required, for example, when the patient is to be billed for services or when the patient makes down payments or copayments (in Germany).

sellin
DistributorResellerManagement (ISHTDRM)
The process by which a manufacturer/supplier sells material to a distributor/reseller for subsequent resale. For the manufacturer/supplier, this process begins with the creation of a sales order and ends with the update of an existing DRM lot, or the creation of a new one. For the distributor/reseller, it begins with the creation of a purchase order and ends with the update of an existing DRM lot, or the creation of a new one. In both cases, an audit trail record is created against the affected lot.

selling country
Foreign Trade (SDFT)
Country in which merchandise is sold for export.

sellthrough
DistributorResellerManagement (ISHTDRM)
The process in which a distributor/reseller resells material to an end customer. For a distributor/reseller, this process begins with the creation of a sales order and ends in reduced available quantity in the relevant DRM lot in the its DRM system. The distributor/reseller reports any sellthrough to the manufacturer/supplier which results in reduced available quantity in the relevant DRM lot in manufacturer/supplier's DRM system. In both cases, an audit trail record is created against the affected lot.

89

semantic integrity
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Correctness and completeness of the data in a database in terms of content.

semifinished product
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Unfinished product. Describes the material type.

send attribute
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
Attribute which the user assigns to a document before sending it. Send attributes contain information for the further processing of a document once it has been sent. Examples: TD: ToDo RR: Reply required NF: No forwarding

send mail
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Step type in a workflow definition for sending an email to internal or external recipients at runtime. The step definition contains all the input fields required to define the email.

sender structure
Executive Information System (ECEIS)
The structure of the data records that are transferred from a different system using a program, or from a file. Also, the structure of the data that is to be transported from ECEIS to a different SAP System.

sender type
Construction Equipment Management (ISECCEM)
A grouping of the different kinds of sender and a central control element in CEM. You can use the sender type to 90

assign a reference type, and therefore also an account assignment object for posting to FI/CO, to the sender.

senderfixed costs
Controlling (CO)
Actual costs that are split according to target costs and target quantities. The costs are already fixed at the senders and remain fixed for that reason.

seniority group
Benefits (PABN)
A customerdefined seniority range, according to which the cost, credit, coverage, or employee/employer contributions for benefit plans vary. Seniority groups can be used alone or in conjunction with other criteria groups to determine these amounts. The system dynamically sorts employees into seniority groups at the time of processing, on the basis of employee data.

seniority leave
Personnel Time Management (PT)
Leave entitlement based on the number of years of service within an enterprise.

SEnumber
Payroll (PY)
The SEnumber indicates the employer's tax identification number. Told&Skat (Danish tax authorities) assigns the SEnumber to the employer.

separate ownership
Real Estate Management (RE)
Part area of the ownership structure of a condominium owners' association. The separate ownership consists of Apartments Other rooms 91

As long as these rooms are included and are part of the separate ownership.

separation label
Retail (ISR)
The following data fields are available for separation labels: Client Plant Plantspecific customer number Language Assortment list type Assortment list version Validfrom date of the assortment list version

separation payment
Korea (PYKR)
It is a scheme by which employers pay money to employees when or before they leave the company.

sequence
Product Variant Structure (LOMDPVS)
Order of activities in a process structure.

sequence
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Sequence of operations that are sorted according to operation number. By defining various sequences in routings or inspection plans, you can create structures that are similar to networks, but less complex. The following sequence categories are distinguished in routings: standard sequence alternative sequence parallel sequence

sequence definition

92

Production Planning for Process Industries (PPPI)


Process instruction that you use at the start of a phase to specify that this phase can only be processed in the PI sheet after you have finished processing another phase. By generating sequence definitions automatically, you can copy the phase relationships maintained in the process order to the PI sheet. In the PI sheet, the process instructions of the phase containing the sequence definition remain inactive until all message data has been reported for the predecessor phases. The system only recognizes phases that belong to the same PI sheet.

sequence of product allocation procedures


Global AvailableToPromise (APOATP)
A setting that determines several alternative product allocations procedures and the corresponding processing sequences during the check.

sequence schedule
Flow Manufacturing (PPFLW)
Product of Sequencing. The system presents the sequence of planned orders graphically in the sequence schedule.

sequenced JIT call


JustInTime Processing (ISAJIT)
A special JIT call, used primarily in the automotive industry. It is used to withdraw parts for a specific vehicle from the vendor. First of all the vendor receives a forecast from material requirements planning in the form of a forecast delivery schedule/JIT delivery schedule without reference to a vehicle and without sequence information. The aim of the sequenced JIT call, which occurs later, is the sequencespecific staging of the parts delivered in production. Here, the sequenced JIT call is given a vehicle reference and sequence information.

sequencing
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
Specifying the processing sequence for the operations at a resource.

93

sequencing
Flow Manufacturing (PPFLW)
Determines the sequence in which planned orders are produced. The order sequence of the finished products for a line is represented graphically in the sequence schedule. The sequence schedule displays the exact schedule, which is time dependent, per line or per line segment. Thus Sequencing is a tool for sequence plan scheduling in flow and repetitive manufacturing.

sequencing
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
Determines the sequence of planned orders and carries out taktbased scheduling. For sequencing, procedures of varying complexity can be used.

sequential file
ABAP Workbench (BCDWB)
File that stores data in sequential order. The records in sequential files are stored one after the other without any key.

sequential processing
Print and Output Management (BCCCMPRN)
Processing type where the spool work process handles output request in the order in which they are generated. If several spool work processes are running on one spool server, the output requests can be processed in parallel.

sequential reading
Archiving (CAARC)
In Data Archiving, means for read access to archived data. The data pointer is positioned directly at the start of the file and is moved, bit by bit through the file. The data stream that is read is transferred directly to the read program. When it reaches the end of the file, the read process is completed. The display program decompresses the data and compares it with the user's selection criteria. All data that matches the selection criteria is then displayed in list form.

sequential sampling inspection


94

Quality Management (QM)


Acceptance sampling inspection in which the decision to draw an additional unit or an additional sample depends on the results that have been recorded during the inspection.

serial number
Logistics Basic Data (LOMD)
Number that you give to an individual item of material in addition to the material number, in order to differentiate that individual item from all the other items of the material. The combination of material and serial number is unique.

serial number profile


Plant Maintenance (PM)
Group of data grouped under a fourdigit identification code, which defines the conditions and operations for assigning serial numbers in the case of serialized materials. The serial number profile must be entered in the master record of the material for which the individual items are to be assigned serial numbers.

serial number profile


Logistics Basic Data (LOMD)
Combined data, grouped under a four figure abbreviation, that determines the conditions and business transactions for issuing serial numbers to serialized materials. The serial number profile must be entered in the material master record for materials that need serial numbers.

Serial Shipping Container Code


Handling Unit Management (LOHU)
The eighteendigit ID Number, often represented in a bar code, used to identify a shipment or transaction. The SSCC is the "license plate" used on variable content containers, pallets, and shipments. (Uniform Code Council Glossary, www.uccouncil.org)

serial switching

95

Device Management (ISUDM)


Register relationship in which one or more registers are connected in a series. The demand of all the registers in a series is measured by the first register in the series.

serialization
Logistics Basic Data (LOMD)
Identification of material items by the assignment of serial numbers.

serialization
ALE Integration Technology (BCMIDALE)
Serialization plays an important role when objects that are dependent on each other are distributed. This applies particularly to master data objects. By distributing messages serially, a specific sequence is adhered to when creating, sending and posting associated IDocs. This avoids errors arising when processing inbound IDocs.

serialization group
ALE Integration Technology (BCMIDALE)
Grouping of IDoc message types in the defined transfer sequence. The data is also distributed in this sequence.

serialization procedure
Logistics Basic Data (LOMD)
Business procedure, in which material serial numbers can be assigned or used for serialized material. Examples of serialization procedures are: Entering a goods issue document Completeness check for a delivery Arrival of returned stock The serialization procedures are bundled in serial number profiles.

96

serialized material
Logistics Basic Data (LOMD)
Individual item of a material which is given a unique identification through the issue of a serial number

server
Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
Data station in a local network that performs particular functions in the network. Depending on the type, a server can: grant and withdraw authorizations (domain server) manage common data manage print output on a connected network printer (print server) manage all connections to the host (communications server)

server group
Archive Development Kit (BCCCMADK)
Includes servers where background jobs for data archiving run.

server network
Database Interface, Database Platforms (BCDB)
Part of the network connecting the application and database hosts to one another. The server network is decisive in achieving high availability of the R/3 System. In this area, additional measures are appropriate to raise the availability of the network and, therefore, the entire R/3 System. Various different technologies can be used to achieve high availability of the network (for example, FFDI, which uses physical redundancy).

service service
IndustrySpecific Component for Hospitals (ISH)
Performable service or material for a medical case.

97

service
Internet Transaction Server / SAP@Web Studio (BCFESITS)
Set of files required by the Internet Transaction Server (ITS) to drive an application that is started from a Web browser and accesses data in the R/3 System. A service consists of a service description, which determines how the service should run, one or more themes and one or more HTML templates (with or without associated flow files). Some services also contain language resources and MIME files.

service
External Services (MMSRV)
Intangible good that is the subject of business activity and that can be performed internally or procured externally (outsourced). Services are regarded as being consumed at the time of their performance. They cannot be stored or transported. Examples of services include construction work, janitorial/cleaning services, and legal services.

service
Training and Event Management (PE)
An organizational unit in a company that provides catering services, such as a company cafeteria or a visitors' canteen. Services are assigned to the rooms to which they cater.

service access point


Telecommunications industry (IST)
The point in a telecommunications network at which a subscriber can use a service provided by a provider.

service area
Waste Management (ISUWA)
Area in a company responsible for a certain type of waste service. Example: Street cleaning Bulk waste 98

Discharge system container services

service area
Telecommunications industry (IST)
Area surrounding a local exchange in which subscribers can easily receive a connection, taking technical aspects such as damping and loop resistance into account. In small local networks where all subscribers are connected to the same switching center, the service area may be equivalent to the local exchange area.

service assurance
Industry Solution Telecommunications (IST)
Process from recording and qualifying trouble tickets reported by the customer or the network to trouble resolution and notifying the customer concerned, where necessary.

service audit
Logistics General (LO)
Part of quality audit.

service bulletin
Specification 2000 (ISADSPC)
Document issued by the manufacturer to notify the airline of recommended modifications, substitutions of parts, special inspections or checks, reduction of existing life limits or establishment of first time life limits, and conversion from one engine model to another. The three types of Service Bulletins are: Alert Service Bulletins for all matters concerning the urgent attention of the operator and are limited generally to items affecting safety. Standard Service Bulletins where the use of Alert Service Bulletins is not required. Engine Conversion Service Bulletins for information necessary to convertengine models from one designation level to another.

service calculation
Benefits (PABN)
A function that calculates the length of service credited to an employee for various purposes. The calculation is customerdefined and based on employee data. 99

service center
(CRM)
Location where a customer can obtain service and where a service is rendered. The primary function of a service center is to execute customer service requests. For a manufacturer, the service center can be the local repair center; for a professional services organization, it is the local site or subsidiary site; for educational services, it is the training center; in the retail industry, it is the customer service center.

service charge group


Real Estate Management (RE)
Means of grouping service charges into: Operating expenses Heating costs General costs (operating and heating expenses)

service charge key


Real Estate Management (RE)
Describes the type of costs that a Real Estate object incurs. Distinctions are made between: Apportionable service charge keys: in the settlement, these costs can be apportioned to the tenant as service charges Nonapportionable service charge keys: costs cannot be apportioned to tenant

service charge settlement header


Real Estate Management (RE)
Part of a service charge settlement which contains data that is valid for the entire service charge settlement. A service charge settlement header contains: Settlement category Partner Invoice date Invoice number Period start Period end Total amount Tax code

100

service charge settlement verification


Real Estate Management (RE)
Process for entering the details of service charges incurred and verifying them against: Contract data Advance payments Previous settlement results

service charges
Real Estate Management (RE)
These comprise the recurring operating expenses and heating costs of a rental unit.

service code
IndustrySpecific Component for Hospitals (ISH)
Identification of a service.

service company
Media Sales and Distribution (ISMSD)
Business partner who performs services for the publisher. These services include: Distribution of publications Obtaining orders Carrier collection Performance of research

service contract
Customer Service (CS)
Long term agreement covering the content and the scope of services to be performed for a customer. A service contract describes which services are to be performed, for which objects, and under which conditions. A service contract consists of a header and one or more items. The header and each item can contain the following data: Pricing conditions Contract data 101

Text Status Partner data In addition, each item can be extended to include a billing plan, technical objects and price agreements.

service contract
Customer Bill of Services (ISECBOS)
As a rule, service contracts are awarded for construction work. This means that payment is measured against the service to be performed. There are two contractual forms: unit price contract flatrate contract Theoretically, both forms can exist in each service line (in SAPsystem line types).

service cost center


Controlling (CO)
Cost center that supports other cost centers in the performance of their activities.

service date
Waste Management (ISUWA)
Date on which a waste disposal service is rendered (such as container emptying or street cleaning). Service dates are calculated via the service frequency and a time slice of the service frequency. Example: The service frequency is every first Tuesday of the month. The time slice lasts from 01/01/1999 bis 31/03/1999. Dates are calculated as follows: Tuesday, 05/01/1999, Tuesday 02/02/1999, and Tuesday 02/03/1999

service description
Internet Transaction Server / SAP@Web Studio (BCFESITS)
Set of parameters that determines how an ITS service runs. The service description is defined in the relevant service file.

102

service description
External Services (MMSRV)
Text precisely defining a service that is to be procured. A service description is entered in a set of service specifications for each individual service (or task) that is to be performed.

service employee
(CRMBTXSVO)
Employee from an executing service organization that performs services. The service employee is represented in the system as business partner.

service employee assignment


(CRMFSP)
Information about when and by whom a service task should be performed. The assignment is displayed as a horizontal bar in the Gantt area of the resource planning tool.

service engineer
Generic Service tools (SVGST)
The person who performs one of the remote SAP Services, such as an SAP GoingLive Check session or an SAP EarlyWatch Service session.

service entry sheet


External Services (MMSRV)
List of services performed by a vendor on the basis of a purchase order, containing service descriptions and details of quantities and values. The descriptions of planned services deriving from the purchase order appear as default values in the entry sheet. Unplanned services, which were originally entered in the purchase order without descriptions and only with the aid of value limits, are precisely defined in the service entry sheet.

service entry sheet

103

Customer Bill of Services (ISECBOS)


The service entry sheet (quantity takeoff) is the recording of data to determine the scope of the services performed (actual site status). It is created repeatedly during construction progress and is used as the basis for payment (creation of progress payment invoice / partial final invoice / final invoice).

service file
Internet Transaction Server / SAP@Web Studio (BCFESITS)
File that contains a service description. Service files contain parameters that determine how ITSdriven services run. If this information is incomplete at runtime, the ITS derives some details from the global service file, which contains settings for all services. There is one service file for each service (application). You can create service files in the SAP@Web Studio (outside the R/3 System) or the Web Application Builder (in the R/3 System).

service frequency
Waste Management (ISUWA)
Frequency with which a service (such as emptying or cleaning) ) takes place for a container in waste management. The service frequency is only valid for a certain time slice. The external scheduling and dispatching system uses the specified frequency and time slice to determine the exact dates.

service index
Industry Component Engineering Construction (ISEC)
Identifier for a service line. To ensure that communication between the contractor and the soldto party is clear, many industries assign unique identifiers to service lines.

service item
External Services (MMSRV)
Line in a set of service specifications that uniquely identifies a service to be procured.

104

service item
(CRMBTX)
Item in the service transaction that describes a service. The service item is used to document customer requirements, the procedure for performing a service and for storing data relevant for planning. Data relevant for planning can be the executing service organization, dates and the estimated duration of execution. You can enter a service product in service item. If however, you do not use a service product, you have to maintain the item type manually.

service item list


(CRMFSP)
Area in the resource planning tool where you can select service tasks.

service level
Material Requirements Planning (PPMRP)
Percentage indicating the proportion of required quantities of materials that is covered by stock on hand in the warehouse or stores. Between 90% and 95% is generally sufficient since a higher service level results in a disproportionate increase in storage costs. The service level is used by the system to calculate the safety stock.

service line
Customer Bill of Services (ISECBOS)
Quantitative and qualitative description of a service in a Bill of Service(BOS). In the construction industry the total requested services for construction are, for example, represented in a technical description and organized into individual service lines. SAP uses the term service line instead of the term normally used in the industry (service item) because an item in the R/3 System refers to a document item.

Service Management
Customer Service (CS)
R/3 application module, that you can use to process services. Service Management mainly comprises the following functions:

105

Structuring and management of technical objects for which services are to be performed (for example, technical systems, machines) Management of data regarding warranties and business partners Creation of service requests Planning and execution of the requested services Billing of the costs that arise as a result of the services Monitoring of call processing to ensure dates and agreed response times are met

service master
External Services (MMSRV)
Repository for the descriptions of all services that a firm frequently has to procure. There is a service master record for each individual service description. The service master database serves as a source of default data set by the system when you create service specifications (used, for example, for invitations to bid sent to potential subcontractors during the competitive bidding process).

service master record


Customer Service (CS)
Product/material master record, in which a service is described in the same way as a physical product, including pricing information.

service name
Internet Transaction Server / SAP@Web Studio (BCFESITS)
Name of an ITS service. The service name is used by the Internet Transaction Server (ITS) to call an Internet application and display it in the Web browser.

service notification
Customer Service (CS)
Means by which notifications from a customer are entered and managed in Customer Service. Standard notification types include: Problem notifications Activity reports Service requests

106

service number
External Services (MMSRV)
Key that uniquely identifies a service. A service number can be either the number of a service master record or a standard service catalog number (SSC no.).

service order
Customer Service (CS)
Used as a means of documenting service and customer service activities.

service organization
(CRMFSP)
Organizational unit in Service where services are planned and prepared. It is responsible for the commercial success of Service within an existing organizational structure. Several responsible service organizations can be assigned to one service organization. For example, the service organization "South" can be subdivided into the responsible service organizations "Munich" and "Stuttgart".

service organization responsible


(CRMBTXSVO)
Service organization in charge of the customers.

service parameter
Internet Transaction Server / SAP@Web Studio (BCFESITS)
Parameter that determines how an ITS service should run. You define service parameters either in the service file of a specific service file or the global service file.

service plan
Customer Service (CS)
Description of the service and maintenance work to be performed, where the deadlines and the scope of the work are defined for a service object. 107

There are three types of service plans: Timebased service plans Performancebased service plans Multiple counter plans

service price
Contract Billing (ISUBI)
Unit price per reference value for providing electric power for a certain period of time.

service product
(CRMBTXSVO)
Describes the service that can be executed either at the customer's or internally. The service product is displayed as an item in the transaction. Prices can be assigned to the service product via condition maintenance.

service product
Customer Service (CS)
Service that is sold and performed in Customer Service. Sales orders and service orders can be used to process these customerbased business transactions. Service products can be listed in addition to materials in a sales order. The service product is then shown as a service item in the sales order. A service order is created for this item. Service products can be configured. The configurable service product enables detailed pricing. It is possible to perform billing on the basis of the prices of the service product in the sales order and/or on the basis of the costs in the service order. When doing this, configurable service products play an important role.

service product
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Material that represents a customer's repair request. The service product is represented in the system by a material master record. Service products are measured in the unit of measure "piece". If required, you can define the service product as a configurable or configured material. The service product is used to determine: What services the customer should pay for How much these services cost Which tasks are required to perform the services

108

service profile
Customer Service (CS)
Means by which you define the times at which call processing can be performed with a notification partner. The availability times defined in the service profile form the basis for the calculation of the start and finish dates defined at task level. The expected duration for the execution of the task is defined in the response profile for each task code. Example: In the service profile, you can define that a task defined in the response profile can be performed from Monday to Friday, from 8.00 to 12.00 and from 14.00 to 18.00.

service profit center


Profit Center Accounting (ECPCA)
Profit center to which Profit Center Accounting data is transferred, which has been marked for allocation in another CO component. Data is allocated as follows: using assessment, distribution or accrual from service cost centers to final cost centers at order settlement To reflect these processes in Profit Center Accounting, the system allocates the data from the service profit center to "real" profit centers.

service provider
SAP Utilities (ISU)
Company that offers on or more of the following services (service types): energy generation energy sales energy transmission energy distribution meter installation and maintenance meter reading A service provider can offer customers one or more utility product services of a number of service types. A service provider can be either an external company or an internal division of the original company.

109

service provisioning
Industry Solution Telecommunications (IST)
Process to sell and provide telecommunications products/services. Consists of sales support, order entry and validation, order processing and service completion (e.g. activating network elements).

service report
Generic Service tools (SVGST)
The summary of results of an SAP Service, such as an SAP GoingLive Check or an SAP EarlyWatch Session. Includes the ratings of the most important checks and detailed suggestions on how to improve the system's operation, performance, and reliability.

service request
Customer Service (CS)
Service notification requesting the service or customer service department to perform a particular activity. The activity is not intended to repair a malfunction or damage; a sales notification would be created for this. The service request is used more in the case of reconstructions, replacements and so on.

service request
(CRM)
Transaction type in Service used to request a service.

service segment
IDoc Interface (BCSRVEDI)
Part of the EDI standard which provides the framework for EDI messages, message groups, and interchange files, for example: receiver data sender data interchange file reference control counter

110

service session
Generic Service tools (SVGST)
One of the several (usually remotely performed) analyses that make up an SAP Service. Each service session has a specific objective and results in an extensive report with a detailed actions list and recommendations. Example The SAP GoingLive Check consists of five service sessions: Project Session Feasibility Session Analysis Session Optimization Session Verification Session

Service Session Workbench


Generic Service tools (SVGST)
An integrated component of the mySAP.com Support Workplace that enables the user to perform computerbased service procedures, such as the SAP GoingLive Check or the SAP EarlyWatch Service, for the analysis of system performance.

service specifications
External Services (MMSRV)
Listing and description of services for procurement purposes. Sets of service specifications include service items with detailed descriptions or items with value limits for unplanned services. For bid solicitation purposes, service specifications are entered in requests for quotation (RFQs). If the specified work is to be awarded directly to a bidder, the service descriptions are entered in a purchase order (PO). If longerterm business relations are entered into with certain suppliers or contractors, specifications can be entered in contracts. The individual service descriptions need not be entered manually, but can be copied from the service master or from already existing specifications.

111

service system
Online Correction Support (Support Packages) (BCUPGOCS)
A system in which SAP coordinates software correction activities.

service task
(CRMFSP)
Job description of a service employee in the resource planning tool. It contains information from the service item (for example, estimated duration) and additional information from the service transaction environment, such as customer information.

service task list


Customer Service (CS)
A generally available description of the procedure for performing a service task that contains the required resources (working time, material, production resources and tools).

service team
(CRMMDORG)
Organizational unit to which service employees are assigned according to tasks or other criteria. It performs service tasks at customer sites.

service transaction
(CRMBTXSVO)
A business object that enables the execution of service processing. The service transaction can be either a service order or a service request.

service type
Human Resource Funds and Position Management (PAPM)
Division of the personnel structure into cost and service statement, service and pricing listing, and hospital accounting regulation. The service type is comparable to the cost center, and is used for account determination.

112

service type
Master Data (ISUMD)
Describes a service offered to the customer and then explicitly specified when the customer's installation is created in the system. The customer is allocated to a service provider through the contract. The service provider must be licenced to perform the service required.

service type catalog


Human Resource Funds and Position Management (PAPM)
Summary of several service types in an area. Example: service type catalog for the hospital or home area.

service user
Users and Authorizations (BCCCMUSR)
User of type service. This user can be used by a large set of initially anonymous users. The functions available to service users are usually very restricted. A session which began as an anonymous service user session can continue as a personal dialog user session after authentification (UserSwitch).

service window
Customer Service (CS)
Period, during which service tasks can generally be performed. Service windows are used as the basis for defining service profiles. Example: All service technicians are available every day during usual business hours. Therefore, you define the service window as "Monday to Friday, from 8.00 to 12.00 and from 14.00 to 18.00".

service window
Waste Management (ISUWA)
Specified period of time in which a waste management service is to take place, for example, only between 09:00 and 11:00.

113

service wizard
Internet Transaction Server / SAP@Web Studio (BCFESITS)
Dialog in the SAP@Web Studio for creating ITS services. You use the service wizard to create service files for ITSdriven applications based on R/3 dialog transactions.

service zone
Customer Service (CS)
Geographical area in which services are provided under certain conditions. Example: For service zone 1 (within a radius of 50 miles) travel costs are not charged, for service zone 2 (between 50 and 100 miles from the service company) a certain portion of the travel costs is charged, and for service zone 3 (over 100 miles away) the total travel costs are invoiced.

serviceable item
Customer Service (CS)
Object on which services or customer services can be performed. Serviceable objects do not have to be physical devices (enabling both concrete devices and also software to be represented). These items can also be managed using serial numbers.

serviceable material
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Material which is the subject of an action in repairs processing. For example, serviceable materials can be: Goods to be repaired Goods to be scrapped Replacements for faulty goods

session
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Instance of an R/3 window within the SAP GUI.

114

A session allows you to perform a certain task. When you log on to the R/3 System, the system opens a session. You can then open up to five more sessions, which all behave like separate logons to the R/3 System. The number of the current session is displayed in the status bar. To open a new session, you choose 'System> Create session'.

session
Network Infrastructure (BCNET)
Connection between two logical units.

session created during reload


Archive Development Kit (BCCCMADK)
When an archiving session is reloaded into the database, not all the data may (need to) be reloaded. The data not reloaded is written to a new archiving session. Note: reloading should only be used under special circumstances when for instance, data was archived that should not have been. In that case, the data should be reloaded immediately after being archived. If the time interval is any longer, database consistency may be compromised.

session handling
(WP)
Session Handling in the mySAP.com Workplace allows you to have more than one application (session) open at a time. The user works with several browser windows, all of which are directly displayed as frames in the mySAP.com Workplace and which the user can choose by selecting channels.

session list
Session Manager (BCFESSEM)
User menu and Session Manager facility. The session list displays all currently active R/3 sessions.

session log
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Record of a batch input session run. One session log is created for each session run and stored in an external file at operating system level.

115

Session logs contain messages generated by the batch input system and by the transactions processed in a session. They also contain overall statistics.

Session Manager
Session Manager (BCFESSEM)
Tool for managing R/3 sessions and system logons. The Session Manager is a graphical navigation interface that allows you to manage the sessions of one or more R/3 Systems, and several clients. You can use the Session Manager to generate companyspecific menus and create your own userspecific menus. The Session Manager runs under Windows NT and Windows 95.

session overview
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
List of batch input sessions. The session overview contains the session name, date and time of creation, the session status and the name of the person who created the session, among others. You can select a session from the session overview and run it, provided the session does not have the status "locked" or "processed".

set
Master data (CRMMD)
Specific instance of a set type. For example, you have the set type Shipping with the attributes Shipping condition and Delivery priority. A possible instance of this set type would be a shipping set with the values Free on board and High respectively. A set can exist only if it is assigned to at least one object (such as a business partner or product). You can assign it to more than one object if necessary.

set
Special Purpose Ledger (FISL)
Object that groups together specific values or ranges of values under a set name. The set values exist within one or more dimensions of a database table.

116

The following set types are used: Basic sets Key figure sets Singledimension sets Multidimension sets

set
Retail (ISR)
Group of single materials or variants of one or more generic materials that is sold as a separate material and as such has a material number, a sales price, and sales price conditions. The components of a set can belong to different material groups and can also have different tax rates. However, the set itself must always have a single tax rate. It is normally assembled at the retailer's. Sets are usually handled in one of the following ways: As sales sets The components are packaged together and can often also be sold individually. Example Shirt with matching tie Body care set As price sets Price sets are formed only by the assignment of a joint sales price. This price is normally lower than the total sales price of each of the components which can always also be sold individually. The components are not packaged together. Example 3piece suite 3piece luggage set Stock is managed at component level if the components can also be sold individually. The stock can also be managed at set level.

set
Consolidation (FILC)
A set is an ordered group of elements that are of the same type. FILC employs sets for numerous areas, such as data input, currency translation, intercompany eliminations, and reports. The following types of elements can occur: 117

financial statement items transaction types trading partners currencies years of acquisition

set
Real Estate Management (RE)
Means of grouping selection criteria and denoting it as a fixed value or variable. The groups allow Real Estate objects to be selected and enable the groups to be available in all clients with a set name, for example to select a business entity according to the criteria in the group. In the RE component, only the set type "Basic sets" is used.

set
Production Planning and Control (PP)
In capacity planning (CRP), sets are used in order to group selection criteria and mark them as fixed or variable values. These groupings enable users to select, for example, work centers according to predefined criteria.

set ID
Consolidation (FILC)
A set is an ordered group of elements that are of the same type. FILC employs sets for numerous areas, such as data input, currency translation, intercompany eliminations, and reports. The following types of elements can occur: financial statement items transaction types trading partners currencies years of acquisition

set of hits
CrossApplication Components (CA)
Set of specifications that fulfill certain search criteria.

118

set of rules
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Set of rules that describe the dependencies that exist between properties.

set type
Master data (CRMMD)
Semantic grouping of applicationspecific attributes. These attributes are frequently required together to: Implement one or more related parts of a business process Example: You may want to define the set type Shipping with the attributes Shipping condition and Delivery priority for a business partner. Describe an object in more detail Example: You may want to define the set type Technical Data with the attributes Refresh frequency and Screen diagonal for a product. The assignment of a set type to an object (such as a business partner or product) can be: Mandatory For example, an address must be assigned to a business partner. Optional For example, the assignment of technical data to a product to describe the product in more detail. The set type contains the set ID and its technical data for controlling the set functions (such as table, screen, and function module for initialization, storage, and resetting). Other customerdefined set types can be added to those provided by SAP.

set up
Production Planning and Control (PP)
The act of preparing a work center for the specific operation to be carried out there.

set variable

119

Special Purpose Ledger (FISL)


Placeholder for a set. The variable can be changed when a program that uses the variable is executed. Set variables can be used in multidimension sets or in the definition of a Report Writer report.

settlement
Commissions (ISISCS)
14529F80A706D3119B420060B0671ACC settlement

Commissions (ISISCS)
Check for disbursement (or recall) of amounts due. In addition to performancerelated remuneration, flatrate remuneration and guarantees are settled in as far as these are posted and due. This means settlement can take place without periodic tasks, such as monthly guarantee settlements, being carried out . Commission contract partners with several commission contracts will receive at least as many settlements (individual listings). However these can only be paid out over the same disbursement account. It is also possible to summarize payments on one commission contract with several different items and to make these payments to one or several disbursement accounts. Settlement information is taken from the settlement agreement. Cost account assignment is controlled by the remuneration type. Only the due amounts from valid documents are settled together. Invalid documents are not included. If a document has not yet been settled, but is set as invalid, it will be reversed through the new calculation. In this case the document number of the newly calculated document is written to the document line item as the settlement document.

settlement
Treasury Management (TRTM)
Form of exercise for an option: Physical settlement: The underlying is actually delivered according to the terms arranged. Cash settlement: A cash payment is made for the difference between strike price and the current spot price.

settlement

120

Treasury Management (TRTM)


The status of a transaction changes after this checking and monitoring stage. Missing information relating to payments and postings can be added at this point.

settlement
Controlling (CO)
Full or partial allocation of calculated costs from one object to another. The following objects can be settlement senders: Internal orders Maintenance orders CO production orders Production orders Process orders Service orders General cost objects Sales order items Networks Projects The following objects can be settlement receivers: Assets Internal orders Profitability segments Cost centers Sales order items Materials Networks Projects G/L accounts

settlement
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
A settlement in the sense of an exchange is, in most cases, the monthly setting up of a list containing the exchanged materials and fees incurring. With the settlement, the logical inventory of the exchanged materials will be balanced, and a list of the fees incurring will be created. A billing document will not be created here, but through the normal billing process.

settlement
121

Sales and Distribution (SD)


The process by which a clearing house receives a request for payment from a merchant (retailer), then reimburses that merchant for cleared payment card transactions, minus its own fee.

settlement assignment
Controlling (CO)
Tool used to define the assignment of a cost element or cost element group in which costs arise to a settlement cost element. The settlement assignment is part of a settlement structure.

settlement calendar
Purchasing (MMPUR)
Calendar in which validity periods for conditions and planned settlement dates are stored. The planned date for settlement between the parties to a rebate arrangement is the last day of a validity period. Example: The validity period January 1 to April 30 is agreed for a condition (e.g. volumebased rebate). Settlement with regard to this condition is to be effected at the end of each month. Final settlement is due to take place on April 30.

settlement category
Commissions (ISISCS)
Controls how a settlement amount is applied. In the commission system, a distinction is made between the two following settlement categories: Disbursement Reserves

settlement category
Invoicing (ISUIN)
Key that specifies the contract account reference in the automatic settlement postings. Together with the settlement type it forms the key that is used in the Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FICA) component to define the settlement rules.

122

settlement column format


Advertising Management (ISMAM)
Page/column format used to perform settlement for an ad. If condition records have not been created for all ads in pricing, the page/column format for which condition records have been created can be used and multiplied by a suitable conversion factor to determine prices. Page/column formats are usually required if sections and classified ads are produced using different page/column formats and condition records have only been created in pricing for ads that have been placed in the classified ad section.

settlement cost element


Controlling (CO)
Cost element with which costs are allocated from one object to another.

settlement document
Controlling (CO)
Document type required for settlements and for the reversal of settlements.

settlement form
Controlling (CO)
Settlement parameter of an order or project item. This item specifies how the costs that are to be settled are determined: From the cost segments (totals settlement) From the line items (line item settlement)

settlement group
Retail (ISR)
Grouping of materials subject to the same conditions in the case of subsequent settlement of amounts due under volume rebate arrangements.

settlement indicator

123

Construction Equipment Management (ISECCEM)


An indicator that controls whether CEM basic data and settlement data for the appropriate recipient, standard recipient or dummy recipient is used in settlement (3level hierarchical access).

settlement order
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Order, to which a maintenance order can be settled. The settlement order can be noted in the master record of a technical object so that a settlement rule can be created automatically for a maintenance order belonging to this object.

settlement package
Construction Equipment Management (ISECCEM)
A list of equipment, the items of which are sent and settled in their entirety.

settlement parameter
Controlling (CO)
Control data required for order settlement. The settlement parameters consist of the following: Processing group Settlement cost element Settlement receiver

settlement package
Construction Equipment Management (ISECCEM)
A list of equipment, the items of which are sent and settled in their entirety.

settlement parameter
Controlling (CO)
Control data required for order settlement. The settlement parameters consist of the following:

124

Processing group Settlement cost element Settlement receiver

settlement participation
Real Estate Management (RE)
Defines how a leaseout participates in a service charge settlement. The settlement participation is dependent on: Settlement units and service charge keys The relevant apportionment units The relevant conditions for the settlement types Manual settings determine other dependencies. Example: Maximum costs

settlement payment
Real Estate Management (RE)
A condition amount that is paid by a tenant living in an apartment subsidized with outside funds although the tenant's income exceeds the minimum level required to qualify for the subsidy. As the settlement payment is paid directly to the landlord (which is not the case for false occupancy charges), a record of the payment should be kept on the leaseout (and also on the rental unit, if required).

settlement period
Real Estate Management (RE)
Defines the periods in which the service charge settlements are to be carried out.

settlement profile
Controlling (CO)
Requirement for creating a settlement rule. You define the following parameters in the settlement profile: Allowed settlement receivers (such as cost center or asset) Default values for the settlement structure and the PA transfer structure Allocation bases for defining the settlement shares (using percentages and/or equivalence numbers) Maximum number of distribution rules Residence period of the settlement documents Document type for settlements relevant to accounting, or, more specifically, to the balance sheet. 125

Definitions for the settlement of actual costs or the cost of sales

settlement profile
Outbound SelfBilling Procedure (ISASBO)
Key which is assigned to the vendor in the master record. Using this key you can define the following parameters for creating settlement documents for automatic evaluated receipt settlements: Terms of payment Payment deadline Document creation type (per vendor, per order, per delivery note or per material document)

settlement receiver
Controlling (CO)
Object to which costs are allocated during the settlement procedure.

settlement request list


Retail (ISR)
List of documents in Agency Business that groups together several incoming invoices for a creditor (invoicing party). A preceding document does not need to exist in the system before a settlement request list can be created, but it can still be used to create followon documents.

settlement rule
Commissions (ISISCS)
This describes settlement in the commission system. It is defined in the settlement agreement. It determines the type of remuneration, for example, to be settled. Each settlement rule refers to exactly one settlement type.

settlement rule
Controlling (CO)
The settlement rule determines what portions of a sender's costs are to be settled to which receiver(s). You specify this by assigning one or more distribution rules to each sender. Typically there is one distribution rule for each receiver.

126

settlement run
Commissions (ISISCS)
Run that settles, for each commission contract, the amounts to be disbursed (or recalled). All amounts due are processed, and a posting document is generated for each interface record being sent to a disbursement system. This document clears the due amounts that have been settled.

settlement run
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Procedure in which payment request data is generated and sent to a clearing house.

settlement run number


Sales and Distribution (SD)
Number assigned to a job run which generates payment request data to be sent to a merchant bank or clearing house. This number is used for identification and tracking purposes.

settlement share
Controlling (CO)
The settlement share specifies the share (expressed as either a percentage rate or an equivalence number) of the sender object costs distributed to each receiver. Example: The costs for a sender object are 40% distributed in one instance, and in five parts in another (equivalence number = 5). The settlement share is 40% for the percentage settlement 5 shares of the total costs for the proportional settlement

settlement step
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (ISUCA)
Consecutive number within a settlement variant that identifies individual steps in the underlying settlement strategy. The rules for grouping, sorting, and clearing the items are defined in the individual steps. The number determines the processing sequence of the individual steps.

127

settlement structure
Controlling (CO)
Settles the costs incurred on a sender to different receivers according to cost element or cost element group. The settlement assignment defines the assignment of the cost element group to a settlement cost element. A settlement structure contains a number of such settlement assignments. A settlement structure must fulfill the following requirements: Completeness: To ensure proper settlement, a settlement structure must include all cost elements under which costs are incurred. Uniqueness: A given cost element must only occur once within a settlement structure.

settlement type
Construction Equipment Management (ISECCEM)
An indicator that determines how the recipient is settled. Together with the calendar ID, the complete month and the no. days/month indicators in the CEM settlement data of the recipient master record, it forms an important factor in longstanding determination of settlement data. There are the following settlement types for longstanding data determination: 1) Complete months + remaining calendar days 2) Complete months + remaining working days 3) Calendar days 4) Working days If you want to use method 1 or 3 (calendar days), you have to enter the number of calendar days per month (for example, 30) that you want the system to use as a basis for its calculations. If you want to use method 2 or 4 (working days), you have to enter the number of working days per month (for example, 20) that you want the system to use as a basis for its calculations. In addition to the number of calendar or working days per month, you must also set the complete month indicator to 1 or 2 for settlement types for which a complete month is relevant. If the settlement type is 3, the system determines the actual number of calendar days. All other statistics, including the Calendar ID indicator, have no effect on the calculation. If the settlement type is 4, the system determines the number of working days by using the factory calendar (Calendar ID indicator). All other statistics have no effect on the calculation. 128

settlement type
Real Estate Management (RE)
Defines the way the service charges (service charge key) participate in the service charge settlement The settlement type is predefined by the system: No participation Advance payment Flat rate Final settlement

settlement type
Controlling (CO)
The following settlement types are defined in the SAP System: Periodic settlement (PER): Settles costs by period. Only includes the costs of the settlement period. Full settlement (FUL): Settles all costs on a sender object that were incurred up to the period of settlement. Capitalization of assets under construction (AUC): Settles capital investment measures to assets under construction by period. R/3 generates this settlement type automatically. Preliminary settlement (PRE): Settles debits posted on capital investment measures to CO receivers before periodic settlement to assets under construction. Lineitem settlement for assets under construction (LIS): Enables lineitem settlement of assets under construction for which lineitem management has been defined. R/3 sets this settlement type automatically (not for capital investment measures).

settlement type
Invoicing (ISUIN)
Key that refers to the business process in the automatic settlement postings. It is used in the Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FICA) component to determine the payment allocation or settlement rules.

129

settlement type
Commissions (ISISCS)
Description of the settlement forms in the commission system. A settlement type includes the following: Settlement category Account assignment type Target system (disbursement system) Period management

settlement type
Training and Event Management (PE)
The method defined for handling attendance and cancellation fees. The settlement types are: Billing Activity allocation Free of charge

settlement unit
Real Estate Management (RE)
Determines the type of settlement used for service charge settlements. The settlement unit defines the: Settlement period (settlement periods/variants) Type of service charges (for instance hot water supply) Apportionment factors (for instance hot water consumption m3) Participating rental units

settlement variant
Real Estate Management (RE)
A number of settlement periods adding up to a year. The settlement year does not have to correspond with the calendar year. Settlement variants can be yeardependent.

130

settlement variant
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (ISUCA)
Key under which the rules for automatically allocating open items for clearing are defined.

setup characteristic
Quality Management (QM)
Inspection characteristic that is used to determine default values for the setup of the production process.

setup group
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
Classification of an operation according to a characteristic that is relevant to planning and which the system should consider when scheduling and rescheduling operations at resources. Setup groups are used in the Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling in APO as follows: For single resources the setup group characterizes the setup status required for processing an operation. The system can use a setup matrix during detailed scheduling to adjust the setup time for an operation according to the sequence of operations or during setup optimization to define the optimal sequence of operations. Setup keys are used to provide a more detailed classification of setup statuses within a setup group. For multi resources the setup group characterizes any particular characteristic of an operation, for example, the temperature at which an operation is carried out. The system can synchronize operations with the same characteristic and the same duration, that is, it can plan them simultaneously on one resource.

setup group category


Production Planning and Control (PP)
Groups together the setup group keys. For example you can combine lathes with different setup group keys to form a setup group category "Turning".

setup group key


Production Planning and Control (PP)
Key used in routings to group operations with the same or similar setup conditions. The setup group key can be used in capacity leveling to optimize the setup time. This is done by determining the setup sequence with the shortest setup times.

131

setup key
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
Detailed classification of the setup status within a setup group. Setup keys are used to define exceptional setup statuses in the setup matrix. See setup group and setup matrix.

setup matrix
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
A matrix that contains the setup duration and the setup costs that are necessary to change the resource by means of a set up process from one status to another status for each possible setup transition at a single resource. Setup statuses are identified by setup groups or setup keys. Setup times and setup costs that are depedent on sequence can be modelled on a single resource (single activity resource or single mixed resource) using a setup matrix. Using the setup matrix that is assigned to the single resource and the resource setup statuses that are entered in the operations and are necessary for processing, the system can do the following: Automatically adjust the duration of the setup activities during detailed scheduling Determine during optimization the optimal operation sequence in terms of the setup time or setup costs. .

setup recipe
Production Planning for Process Industries (PPPI)
A recipe which describes the time, resource and material requirements that exist at the beginning of a campaign as well as the activities that need to be carried out to set up a production run.

setup status
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
Status of the resource (for example, equipment, settings) that is necessary to process an operation and that is achieved by setting up the resource. A setup status is defined by specifying a setup group or a setup key.

setup time

132

Production Planning and Control (PP)


The time needed to prepare the work center for the operations to be carried out there. The setup time is part of the leadtime.

setup time
Logistics Execution (LE)
Time required in shipping to prepare a work center for the processing of materials to be carried out there. The quantity of materials to be shipped does not influence the setup time.

setup transition
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
Transition between two setup statuses of a resource. A setup transition is defined by specifying two setup statuses a preceding setup status and a subsequent setup status.

severance payment
Hong Kong (PYHK)
Payment to which an employee is legally entitled if he or she has worked continuously for an employer for a period of not less than 24 months immediately prior to dismissal by reason of redundancy or layoff. It is reduced by any gratuity or employer's nonmandatory contribution to a retirement scheme. An employee is eligible for either the severance payment or the long service payment but not both.

severity
Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
Attribute that prioritizes alerts in the monitoring architecture of the same criticality. For example, if a monitoring tree displays two red alerts, the red alert with the highest severity is propagated up the tree as the most important alert.

shadow item

133

Industry Solution Telecommunications (IST)


If a material needs to be included in several documents (for example if it appears both in a contract [main document] and in an order [followon document]), then the integrated contract and order manager (ICOM) creates a shadow item for it by making a copy of the underlying item. Shadow items have the following characteristics: They are not included in delta tracking They are never contract items at most the underlying item can be a contract item (a subitem in a contract becomes a main item in an order) When an existing ICOM object is changed, the related shadow items are also changed A node can only have one shadow item They are included in pricing for ICOM processes They lose their link to the superior contract item

shadow table
Upgrade General (BCUPG)
New version of a substitution table, imported at the beginning of the Repository switch upgrade with a temporary name. The substitution tables are replaced with the shadow tables at a later time during the upgrade.

share of defects
Quality Management (QM)
Fraction of nonconforming units or number of defects in each unit.

share of scrap
Quality Management (QM)
Percentage of material that does not meet the quality requirements. The R/3 System estimates the share of scrap in the inspection lot using the share of scrap determined for individual inspection characteristics,or using a predefined distribution function for estimating the share of scrap.

shared distribution list shared folders

134

Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)


Structured folder area in the Business Workplace used for publishing information throughout the enterprise and for shared access to documents, distribution lists and business objects. The shared folders can be restricted entirely, or in part, to certain user groups.

shared lock
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Lock mode in the ABAP Dictionary. A shared lock is assigned in the lock object definition for each table. In a shared lock, users can access the locked records in display mode.

shared lock
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Possible value for the lock mode of a lock object. If there is a shared lock, more than one user can read the same data at the same time, but when one user edits the data, no other user can access this data.

shared trash
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
Folder for deleted documents, distribution lists, and folders. Documents, distribution lists, and folders which were deleted from the shared folders are stored in the shared trash. Only the administrator can access the shared trash.

Sharing of Spare Parts


Industry Component Aerospace Defense (ISAD)
Common process in the airline industry in order to minimize costs. Within a 'pooling' scenario one airline is either the provider (vendor) or the user (customer) of the shared stock and the corresponding parts are to be returned to the vendor. Similar scenarios exist, such as borrowing and loan, that occurs on a onceoff basis and may be converted into a sale, engine lease (leasing or provision of engines on loan to support adhocfailures) and contracted exchange (provision of a unit of spare parts to a customer in anticipation of a unit in exchange).

135

shelf life expiration date


Logistics Execution (LE)
Date up to which a material can be retained in storage and still be acceptable for use.

shelfedge price marking


Retail (ISR)
Attaching of price tickets (placement labels) to the shelves on which a material is displayed.

shift
Personnel Time Management (PT)
Duration and amount of working time during which an employee is required to carry out tasks and responsibilities for an employer. Example: An employee is assigned to the shift NORM (normal working time). Normal working time is defined as working from 8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. each workday. The employee is expected to work during this period.

shift abbreviation
Personnel Time Management (PT)
Abbreviation that indicates a specific type of shift. Examples: EA = Early shift LA = Late shift

shift change compensation


Payroll (PY)
Statutory or collective agreement regulations used in some countries to ensure that the employee is not financially disadvantaged by changes to working time or activity.

shift change compensation

136

Personnel Time Management (PT)


Legal or contractual regulations that exist in various countries to prevent employees from being financially penalized by changes made to their working time (schedules) or job tasks.

shift definition
CrossApplication Components (APOCA)
In a shift definition the following is defined for a shift: Start and finish Break times Rate of resource utilization Capacity of the resource Shift definitions are used in order to define shift sequences.

shift definition
Production Planning and Control (PP)
The start, finish and break times of a shift are determined in the shift definition. The shift definition is valid across all work centers. Shift definitions reduce the work involved in determining available capacity when working hours change because they are maintained centrally.

shift factor
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Percentage in the maintenance strategy that specifes the degree to which a confirmation date, which deviates from the planned date, should be taken into account when scheduling subsequent maintenance plan dates. The system calculates the number of days by which the subsequent dates are shifted using the percentage specified as the shift factor. The negative shift factor is used if the confirmation date is before the due date. The positive shift factor is used if the confirmation date is after the due date.

shift factor
CrossApplication Components (APOCA)
Generic term for the rate of resource utilization and the capacity of a resource. 137

shift factors definition


CrossApplication Components (APOCA)
Contains the rate of resource utilization and the capacity of a resource. The shift factor definition is assigned to a shift definition in order to define the resource utilization and the capacity for a shift.

shift group
Personnel Time Management (PT)
Describes the grouping together of all required shifts for a group for the purpose of shift planning. In a shift group, you can define the shifts required exclusively for various organizational units.

shift plan
Personnel Time Management (PT)
The shift plan is the main screen where shift planning is carried out, in other words, where shift plans are entered and displayed. In the shift planning screen, you can carry out the following tasks: Display and assign employees and shifts to each other Display the current requirements coverage in various views Process, display, and print out your shift plans using various views including the day view, assignment view, and so on.

shift planning
Personnel Time Management (PT)
Assignment of employees to shifts to cover workforce requirements defined to complete businessrelated tasks.

shift rota
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
Shift information used in the area of transportation and distribution in conjunction with the drivers who transport bulk products. For example, a driver may have a shift rota for the period of January 1, 1997 to April 4, 1997. The driver is assigned a specific shift for that period.

138

shift schedule
Personnel Time Management (PT)
This term is no longer used in HR. It has been replaced by monthly work schedule.

shift sequence
CrossApplication Components (APOCA)
In a shift sequence, you define the daily shift order for as many consecutive days as you want. You use shift sequences to define the working times and the capacity in the capacity variants for a resource. To do this, you define in a capacity variant time intervals and: Assign each time interval a shift sequence Define which day of the shift sequence falls on the first day of the time interval The shift sequence repeats itself in cycles, for example, every 5 days for a 5day shift sequence.

shift sequence
Production Planning and Control (PP)
A shift sequence contains a sequence of shifts defined for several work centers for a specific period of time. The central maintenance of shift sequences reduces the work involved in changing the order of shift definitions.

shipanddebit agreement
DistributorResellerManagement (ISHTDRM)
A contractual agreement between a distributor/reseller and a manufacturer/supplier under which a distributor/reseller can sell stock to an end customer and then debit the manufacturer/supplier for an amount determined by the terms of the agreement. The application of a shipanddebit agreement results in a postfacto reduction in the purchase price of stock. Distributor/resellers can, therefore, offer the end customer the stock at a reduced price without reduction in their normal profit margin.

shipment
Sales and Distribution (SD)
The grouping together of goods at a transportation planning point, which have been transported together from the respective points of departure. This is the basis for the planning, implementation and surveillance of physical 139

shipments.

shipment cost comparison


Logistics Execution (LE)
Option to have the system compare two different cost calculation options and to select the least expensive one automatically, for example.

shipment cost document


IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
Document which holds the shipment costs accrued for a shipment. The shipment costs are the total costs for a shipment: freight costs, insurance, vehicle cleaning costs, etc.

shipment costing
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
The process of calculating the shipment costs for a shipment. Shipment costs: The total costs involved in the shipment of a product. Not just pure freight costs, but also cleaning costs, insurance, and other costs as well.

shipment costs
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
Based on the new function in ISOil entitled, "Shipment Costing Function with Carriers". Denotes the costs of moving product with a carrier. Such costs cover more than just freight and product costs, but can also include such costs as insurance and cleaning costs (the costs of cleaning vehicles involved in the shipment). Shipment costing as related to carriers is part of the SAP Transportation Solution with Standard and ISOil.

shipment document
Logistics Execution (LE)
A combination of goods created at a transportation planning point that are transported together from the points of departure to the corresponding destinations. It is the basis for planning, carrying out and monitoring actual physical transportation of goods. A distinction is made between shipments for the transportation of goods from vendors to the company (inbound shipment) and shipments for the transportation of goods from the company to customers (outbound shipment).

140

shipment type
Logistics Execution (LE)
Key for the type of goods movement in the warehouse. Using the transfer type, you can classify individual movement types, such as stock placements stock removals replenishment

shipper's export declaration


Foreign Trade (SDFT)
Form used to list commodities (including quantities, weight, packaging and value) that are being exported to another country. It also includes such information as the point of origin, consignee, forwarding agent, loading pier, date of exportation, bill of lading number, mode of transport, port of export and all other pertinent information for the export shipment. This form is required in duplicate by the US government for all export shipments unless they are 1) Valued at US$ 2500 or less, or 2) Shipments to Canada

shipper's letter of instructions


Foreign Trade (SDFT)
Instructions on how to fill out an export declaration. Exporter specific document that varies from exporter to exporter. It is a letter on company letterhead that provides the freight forwarder with order information pertinent to a shipment.

shipping
Construction Equipment Management (ISECCEM)
A transaction type with which equipment or material is sent from one site to the next (compare: acquisition, retirement and change of activity type).

shipping condition
Sales and Distribution (SD)
General shipping strategy for delivery.

141

If the shipping condition states, for example, that the goods should reach the customer as quickly as possible, the system automatically proposes the fastest shipping point and route.

shipping document
Construction Equipment Management (ISECCEM)
A document that enables you to send equipment, materials and packages with information on quantities and activity type.

shipping document
Logistics Execution (LE)
Database document that reflects a shipping transaction. The following shipping documents exist: Delivery Material document which contains information on goods issue Grouped deliveries

shipping instructions
Purchasing (MMPUR)
Instructions issued to a vendor regarding the shipment or packing of ordered goods.

shipping material
Logistics Execution (LE)
Material which is used for packing and transporting products. Shipping material include crates, pallets or containers. You must always enter a shipping material when you create a shipping unit.

shipping notification
Logistics General (LO)
Notification by the vendor of the anticipated arrival of goods shipped by the latter on the recipient's premises. The shipping notification contains the anticipated delivery date, the quantities, and details of the materials (and/or services). A shipping notification can be sent in the form of an EDI message, by fax or other media. An incoming shipping notification is stored in the R/3 System as an inbound delivery document. An outgoing shipping notification can be generated on the basis of an outbound delivery. 142

shipping package
Construction Equipment Management (ISECCEM)
A list of equipment or materials that can be sent as one "item" in its entirety and can be used to simplify data entry.

shipping point
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Organizational unit in Logistics which carries out shipping processing. The shipping point is the part of the company responsible for the type of shipping, the necessary shipping materials and the means of transport. Example: Possible shipping points could be the company mail depot or plant rail station.

shipping type
Logistics Execution (LE)
Indicator which shows which means of transport and mode of transport (such as road or rail) can be used to carry out a shipment of goods.

shipping unit
Logistics Execution (LE)
Combination of materials which are packed together in a shipping material at a particular time. Shipping units contain items which in turn are made up of shipping units or delivery items.

shipto party
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Person or company that receives the goods. The shipto party is not necessarily the soldto party, the billto party or the payer.

shop floor papers


143

Production Planning and Control (PP)


Documents required for carrying out a work order include: operation control ticket job ticket pick list time ticket confirmation slip

shop papers
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Documents required for the execution of a maintenance order such as: Operation control ticket Job ticket Material provision list Wage slips Completion confirmation slips

shop papers
Customer Service (CS)
Papers that are required for the execution of a service order.

shopfloor complaint lot


Purchasing (MMPUR)
Part of a goods receipt quantity found to manifest quality defects during the production process on the shopfloor (and which is thus the subject of complaint and/or rejection).

shopping basket
Internet Sales (CRMISA)
Virtual shopping basket for collecting and managing chosen products.

short cut
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Way for the user to bypass the standard dialog box with the F4 help. 144

The short cut permits the user to select an elementary search help from a collective search help and to fill out the fields of the dialog box for restricting values directly in the input field.

short description
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Explanatory text for an ABAP Dictionary object

short dump
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Textual listing of runtime errors to support troubleshooting. Short dumps are error messages generated by the ABAP Workbench when a program terminates due to a serious error. The system records the error(s) in the system log and writes a snapshot of the program at the time of termination to the database SNAP.

short EAN
Retail (ISR)
8digit short form of the EAN (International Article Number).

short length
Cable Solution (CAB)
A length that, after all the tolerances have been taken into account, still does not equate to a standard length or a requirement length.

short profile
Recruitment (PARC)
Snapshot summary of applicant data (e.g. administrative view of the applicant's master data or of the applicant activities performed for an applicant).

Short text

145

Customizing (BCCUS)
Title of a document. When a document is assigned to a hierarchy structure, the short text and the structure title are identical.

short time exposure limit


Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Very high concentration of an agent to which a person is exposed for brief periods or occasionally. Short time exposure limits are peak values that are measured during a shift and that occur regularly.

shortage check
Global AvailableToPromise (APOATP)
Product availability check taking into account cumulated confirmed quantities or requirement quantities. A shortage check should be carried out when temporal shifts and quantity changes of planned receipts should be made frequently in comparison to planning in a business transaction in which a product availability check should be carried out.

shortcut key
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Key combination for executing certain commands. Shortcut keys do not exist in the SAP System. They are available only at GUI level (for example, in the layout menu). Possible shortcut key combinations include the following: Strg + C Strg + X Strg + V Strg + Y = = = = Copy Cut Paste Select

shortened fiscal year


Financial Accounting (FI)
A shortened fiscal year arises through a shift in the end of the fiscal year. The shortened fiscal year covers the period between the end of the last fiscal year in the old cycle and the beginning of the next fiscal year in the new cycle. For example, if your old fiscal year runs from October 1 1997 146

to September 30 1998 and you want the new fiscal year to begin on January 1 1999, you would set up a shortened fiscal year for the period October 1 1998 to December 31 1998.

shortfall penalty
Supply Network Planning (SNP) (APOSNP)
The total penalty costs incurred as a result of a delivery of a product that is less than the quantity ordered.

shortstay patient
IndustrySpecific Component for Hospitals (ISH)
Patient whose length of stay in hospital with regard to the current case does not exceed three days.

shortterm characteristic
Quality Management (QM)
Inspection characteristic, whose inspection results must be recorded before you complete the inspection.

shortterm document
Personnel Administration (PAPA)
Changes made to infotypes that are written to the database.

shortterm inspection
Quality Management (QM)
Inspection that has to be completed before you can make a usage decision for the inspection lot.

shoyo
Payroll (PY)
Kind of bonus payment generally paid twice a year to employees in Japan. It is divided into two types: periodical and nonperiodical. Its total amount is usually four or five times the monthly salary.

shutdown

147

Asset Accounting (FIAA)


The temporary removal of a fixed asset from service. You can temporarily shut down an asset using an indicator in the asset master record. During the shutdown period no depreciation is calculated.

shutdown
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Period of time in which a factory (or part of it), is temporarily shut down so that maintenance tasks can be performed.

SI unit
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Measurement unit for a dimension, determined by the international units system (SI, for French: systme internationale des units). Examples: Dimension SI unit Length Meter Time Second Mass Kilogram Electric current Ampere Temperature Kelvin Mol count Mol Light intensity Candela

SIC code
Funds Management (FIFM)
Standard Industrial ClassificationCode. System developed by the United States Census Bureau in order to classify business entities according to their primary type of activity.

sick pay

148

Payroll (PY)
Sick pay is received by the employee from the health insurance fund for the period in which he or she is unable to work and is not, therefore, remunerated by the employer. Such payments are usually effected after the period of continued pay has expired.

side information
Gateway/CPIC (BCCSTGW)
Parameter values for initializing the communication to a partner program. An application program should not contain communicationspecific parameters, so the parameter values are stored as side information in one or more external configuration files. Side info tables contain several parameters: Symbolic name of the destination system (DEST = destination) Connection parameters: Name of the Logical Unit (LU) of the partner Name of the transaction program to be called (TP) spezific parameters depending on the constellation and system platform

signal monitor
JustInTime Processing (ISAJIT)
Displays how many calls are in the various internal processing statuses. It also displays when the last call was created. The user can compare these entries with his own empirical values and can thus recognize and prevent problems in time.

signature method
Logistics General (LO)
The SAP System supports the following signature methods: System signature with authorization by user ID and password Here, you do not need an external security product. Users identify themselves by entering their user IDs and passwords just like when logging on to the system. The SAP System then executes the digital signature, with the name and user ID being part of the signed document. User signature with verification Here, you need an external security product. Users execute digital signatures themselves using their private keys. The signature created by the security product is automatically checked for authenticity.

149

User signature without verification If you use an external security product, you can use this signature method for test purposes but not in a live system. The user executes a signature as described above but automatic verification is switched off.

signature strategy
Logistics General (LO)
Combination of individual digital signatures that are required to sign a transaction. A signature strategy determines: The required individual signatures, that is, the user groups that must sign a transaction The sequence in which the individual signatures must be executed The signature or signatures required to complete the signature process A user can only execute one signature within a signature strategy.

signing agent
Commissions (ISISCS)
Agent who accepted from the customer, and passed on to the company, the application which resulted in a contract.

Silk Road
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
One of SAP's blended codepages that comprises Japanese, English and Greek.

silo
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
The term used to describe an object whose function is to store bulk materials. The silo is normally a large inventory holding object for which technical inventory processes are carried out. Examples of such processes: Gain and loss calculations Tank strapping In the system, the term "silo" is used in a more general sense, i.e. for bulk solids and liquids (silos in the original sense and tanks).

150

silo
Application Components (SAP)
Part of an IT solution that is not integrated with other parts. The name comes from the visualization of such a solution:The different applications stand apart from one another, like farm silos.

similar business
Commissions (ISISCS)
Substituting existing insurance cover with similar cover. The substitute transaction must be identified in the delivery system and reported in the commission case such that the new insurance cover is entered in the commission system under the internal key of the old insurance cover. The liability rules are then applied as though no switch has taken place. For this reason, each object/subobject has an internal key in the commission system.

simple discontinuation
Production Planning and Control (PP)
The process in which a discontinued material is replaced by a followup material. As of a certain date the stock of the discontinued material is allowed to run out and the dependent requirements are rerouted to the followup material.

simple maintenance
Personnel Management (PA)
Simple Maintenance is one of three methods you may use to create and maintain organizational plans. Simple Maintenance allows you to put together a basic framework for organizational plans using a tree structure. The tree structure simplifies procedures. Simple Maintenance is available to traditional human resource users, as well as users of SAP Business Workflow. In Simple Maintenance you can: build up and maintain organizational structures create jobs and positions assign positions to organizational units buildup task profiles for jobs and positions buildup and maintain reporting structures assign cost centers to PD objects

151

Workflow users can also: develop activity profiles for jobs and positions, and assign users to jobs

Simple Maintenance
Organizational Plan (PAOS)
Tool in Organizational Management, with which you can create and model enterprise specific organizational plans quickly and easily. As well as illustrating your current organizational and reporting structure, you can plan and simulate structural changes in your organizational plan in Simple Maintenance.

Simple Object Access Protocol


(WP)
Simple Object Access Protocol) is a way for a program running in one kind of operating system (such as Windows NT) to communicate with a program in the same or another kind of an operating system (such as Linux) by using the World Wide Web's Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and its Extensible Markup Language (XML) as the mechanisms for information exchange. SOAP specifies exactly how to encode an HTTP header and an XML file so that a program in one computer can call a program in another computer and pass it information. It also specifies how the called program can return a response.

simple process data request


Production Planning for Process Industries (PPPI)
Type of process data request for the R/3 PI sheet. A simple process data request can be used to request one message of a specific message category. In the PI sheet, individual input fields are provided for the message characteristics whose values are to be assigned.

simplification of elimination
Consolidation (FILC)
A simplification often occurs when eliminating intercompany revenue and expense. By contrast, the elimination of IC payables and receivables involves only a few balance sheet items the reported consolidation data is therefore reconciled very accurately. However, the elimination of IC revenue and expense usually involves many more items in the income statement. To simplify these eliminations, you can perform onesided eliminations. That is, the elimination is based on the 152

data of only one company, instead of two. Example: The cost of sales for companies A and B is eliminated each on the basis of the sales of the other company. There are no elimination differences.

simplified Chinese
Documentation and Translation Tools (BCDOC)
Written Chinese characters that are streamlined versions of traditional written characters. Simplified Chinese is used in the People's Republic of China and in Singapore.

simplified declaration procedure


Foreign Trade (SDFT)
For this procedure, the exporter enters only the most necessary information in the declaration and submits it to the customs authorities. At the end of the month, the necessary details are included in a combined declaration and sent to the main customs office.

simulated attendance
Personnel Time Management (PT)
A future scheduled shift of an employee that is "simulated" in the present as an attendance to determine employee working time that is either already scheduled or still available for scheduling.

simulated infotype
Personnel Time Management (PT)
Simulated infotypes enable you to run evaluations and reports on a new business level using data from different data sources (infotype data, time evaluation results, personal work schedule data) available in an overview using the infotype concept. You now also have the option of reading and evaluating cluster data (from cluster tables ZES, ZL with ALP and C1) using infotype structures. Simulated infotypes are called "simulated" because the infotype data is not stored in the usual infotype database tables, but provided from various database tables only during the run by a function module in time management. Simulated infotypes can be used simular to regular infotypes for your own ABAP programs and for SAP Query reports because they are provided in the same manner as other infotypes in the logical database PNP.

simulation costing
153

Controlling (CO)
The simulation costing function costs the changed singlelevel or multilevel assemblies within the structure modified products.

simulation of capacity leveling


Production Planning and Control (PP)
A function in capacity planning used to carry out capacity leveling. Via this function you can simulate changes without having them written to the data base. The following data can be changed: dates the available capacity work centers or resources the order status

simulation version
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
Record of simulative planning data based on a planning version. Using a simulation version, you can run through a planning alternative without changing the data in the planning version. You can test different planning alternatives using different simulation versions. You can compare the planning status in the planning version with that in the planning version at any time ("refresh"), or import simulative planning in the planning version ("save"). The planning data in the planning or simulation version is not simply copied in this case, but actually merged. "Hard" data "win", for example, confirmation of an operation is more important that a deadline change.

simulation version
Project System (PS)
A modifiable version of a project that can be used to simulate various alternatives without affecting the operative version. A simulation version can be created by: Copying an operative project Copying another simulation version Creating a simulation version without copying You can create several simulation versions for a project. These can be evaluated and compared. A simulation version can be transferred to an operative project. 154

In contrast to simulation versions, project versions are momentary records of a project (snapshots) and cannot be used for simulation.

simultaneous consolidation
Consolidation (ECCS)
Consolidation procedure of the consolidation of investments, in which when consolidating a given investee unit processes all of the investments, which exist in the subgroup, along with the resulting minority interest in a single step. This procedure is marked by the calculation of the differential from the consolidation of investments, which being the difference between the investments of the direct upper unit and the group's portion of the the investee's shareholders' equity. Simultaneous consolidation is beneficial for complex investment structures, especially nonhierarchical ones, and provides accurate analyses of the ownerships.

simultaneous consolidation
Consolidation (FILC)
When consolidating a given investee company, this consolidation procedure processes in a single step all of the investments that exist in the subgroup and the resulting minority interest. This procedure is marked by the calculation of the differential from the consolidation of investments, which is the difference between the investments of the immediate parent company and the group's portion of the the investee's shareholders' equity. Simultaneous consolidation is beneficial for complex investment structures, especially nonhierarchical ones, and provides accurate analyses of the ownerships.

simultaneous costing
Product Cost Controlling (COPC)
Process that assigns to a cost object the actual costs incurred to date for that cost object.

SINFOS
Retail (ISR)
German national message format for the transfer of material master data, which is PRICATcompatible. SINFOS messages are converted using EDI converters.

155

Single Administrative Document


Foreign Trade (SDFT)
The transfer of commodities in a customs procedure and reexportation require the submission of a customs declaration. Regulations require the use of a single administrative document for this purpose.

single article
Retail (ISR)
Standard article as sold to the customer, for example, a packet of chocolate chip cookies.

single cycle plan


Plant Maintenance (PM)
Time or performancebased maintenance plan, which you can use to control maintenance and inspection tasks that are performed on a reference object. In the single cycle plan, you define one maintenance cycle and the scope of the tasks. In contrast to strategy plans, no maintenance strategies are defined or assigned for a single cycle plan.

single document
Collections/Disbursements (ISISCD)
Transfer document which results in only one posting in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable.

single entry
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
You use this function to enter a single object of a previously chosen object class.

single field type


ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
ABAP data type. Single field types are data types whose data objects occupy exactly one field.

156

single host installation


Internet Transaction Server / SAP@Web Studio (BCFESITS)
Installation option for the Internet Transaction Server (ITS). In a single host installation, both ITS components (WGate and AGate) and the Web server reside on the same host machine. A single host installation is appropriate for development and test systems where security is less critical. It may also be sufficient for some intranet applications. In a single host installation, you can just place a firewall between the Web browser and the Web server.

single log
Change Transport System (BCCTS)
Part of the log overview. A single log describes what happened in a single transport step.

single material
Logistics Execution (LE)
Type of storage whereby a bin location is occupied by one material only. In the SAP system, only one bin quantity may be stored on a bin location if single material storage is defined. Different batches are regarded as different bin quantities.

single material
Retail (ISR)
Standard material as sold to the customer, for example, a 250 g packet of chocolate chip cookies.

single mixed resource


Master Data (APOMD)
Resource type in which scheduling data for periodoriented scheduling to the nearest day can be defined in addition to the scheduling data (work times, capacity) for detailed scheduling to the nearest second. A singlemixed resource combines the scheduling characteristics of a singleactivity resource and a bucket resource, and can therefore be used for detailed scheduling in Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) and CapabletoMatch (CTM), as well as for periodoriented scheduling in Supply Network Planning (SNP). 157

single packaging
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
One single packaging unit enclosing the dangerous goods.

single point of failure


High Availability (BCCCMHAV)
Hardware or software service that, if it fails, causes the entire system to fail, leading to unplanned downtime. It is often advisable to use additional hardware and faulttolerant software so that the service can continue operating. This enables uninterrupted system operation if a single component fails. For example, disk drives might be a hardware single point of failure (SPOF). Disk mirroring reduces the likelihood of failure and can effectively eliminate the SPOF.

single processing
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Standard function in R/3. You use this function to process a single object of a previously selected object class.

single profile
Users and Authorizations (BCCCMUSR)
Type of authorization profile Single profiles contain authorizations. Each authorization is identified by the name of an authorization object and the name of the authorization created for the object.

single resource
Master Data (APOMD)
Superordinate term for singleactivity resources or single mixed resources. Single resources are resources that can only process one activity at a time.

single sampling inspection


158

Quality Management (QM)


Acceptance sampling inspection on the basis of a single sample.

single selection list


Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Control element that offers the user a list of alternatives. Single selection lists must have at least two entries, but you can only select one entry. To select an entry, you select the associated radio button. If the user is meant to choose several elements from the list at the same time, a multiple selection list is used.

single settlement request


Retail (ISR)
Settlement document in Agency Business used to enter a single incoming invoice. The special feature of the settlement request list is that a preceding document does not have to exist in the system before the document can be created, yet it can still be used to create followon documents.

Single SignOn
Security (BCSEC)
Mechanism that eliminates the need for users to enter passwords for every system that they log on to. The Single SignOn allows users to authenticate themselves once, and then log on to all of those systems that operate in the Single SignOn environment without further intervention.

single sourcing
Purchasing (MMPUR)
Procurement of a material exclusively from one particular vendor (due to a technological advantage this vendor may possess over others, for example).

single step
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Execution option in the ABAP Debugger.

159

This option allows you to execute a program statement by statement. If you choose this option, you also branch to any subroutines and function modules, and process all the statements there.

single unit
Quality Management (QM)
Item that is considered individually. Single units that are subject to inspection are also called units to be inspected.

single value
Quality Management (QM)
Individual characteristic value, recorded at the most detailed determination level. The original values for a characteristic determined in a quality inspection can be recorded in the system as single values.

singleactivity resource
Master Data (APOMD)
A resource whose capacity is continually available during working times. Only one activity at a time can be processed at a singleactivity resource. Singleactivity resources are used in Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) and in CapabletoMatch Planning (CTM).

singlebyte language
Application Components (SAP)
Language in which a onebyte address is used to address the characters in the character set. Singlebyte languages include the following: German English French Greek Russian Spanish

singledimension set
Special Purpose Ledger (FISL)
Set that contains basic sets and other singledimension sets that use the same dimension (table field).

160

Singledimension sets are used to create hierarchies of data.

singleentry screen
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Screen within a task (transaction) on which you enter the data of a single subobject.

singlelevel BOM
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Describes one or more assemblies by means of component quantities.

singlelevel packing instruction


Handling Unit Management (LOHU)
Packing instruction which contains no subordinate packing instructions.

singlelevel whereused list


Basic Data (PPBD)
BOM reporting function which determines which assemblies a material is used in and the quantity of the material that is used. Only assemblies which contain the material directly (singlelevel BOM) are listed.

singlerecord buffering
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Type of buffering in the ABPA Dictionary When you use singlerecord buffering, only the record that is read is loaded into the buffer when you access a table record.

Singlerecord buffering
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
One of the possible buffering types for a table. IF you set singlerecord buffering for a table, only those table records that are actually accessed are loaded into 161

the buffer.

singlesegment planning
Profitability Analysis (COPA)
In singlesegment planning in Profitability Analysis, you can plan values for a single profitability segment. Value fields are displayed in the rows of the planning screen and various time periods can be displayed in the columns.

singlestep task
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Task described by an object method. Singlestep tasks can be split into standard tasks and customer tasks, which differ as follows: Standard task Organizational object type TS Crossclient Any plan version No validity period Customer task Organizational object type T Clientspecific Plan versionspecific Validity period Only standard tasks will be supported in the future.

singleunit inspection
Quality Management (QM)
Noting of individual identification for single units, when the inspection results are recorded. This identification can be, for example, the serial numbers of the units to be inspected.

singlevalue recording
Quality Management (QM)
Determines that single characteristic values are to be recorded, when inspection results are recorded. A single value can be: 162

A numeric value (for quantitative inspection characteristics) An attribute code (for qualitative inspection characteristics) The valuation accepted or rejected (for alternative characteristics)

site
Logistics Execution (LE)
Land area with warehouses, parking lots for means of transportation, and possibly also production equipment, warehouse offices, checkpoints, and doors. Activities that take place at a site include: goods receipts, goods issues, and putting together shipments for incoming and outgoing goods flow. The site is an organizational unit to which the warehouse number and the shipping point are assigned.

site
(CRMMW)
The receiver or supplier of data in the context of replication. It is defined on the CRM Server (e.g. mobile clients).

site
Internet Transaction Server / SAP@Web Studio (BCFESITS)
Server location of all files required by the Internet Transaction Server (ITS) to start a service. ITS files are stored in the file system of the ITS server (AGate) or the Web server (WGate), so a site is a combination of these components. Service files, HTML templates, flow files and language resources reside on the ITS server, but MIME files are stored on the Web server. During development, you assign all the files that make up a service to a project in the SAP@Web Studio. At runtime, these files must be located at a site. To move files from the SAP@Web Studio to the site, you must publish them explicitly with the function provided for the purpose. Since an ITS installation can consist of several instances, each configured with one or more Web server / WGate components distributed across multiple AGate servers to support load balancing, the SAP@Web Studio allows you to define multiple sites.

site
Email, Fax, and Telephony Interfaces (BCSRVCOM)
A site groups together several extensions. Several telephony servers can be assigned to a site. The attributes of the site apply to all the telephony servers assigned to it: Country Telephone number prefix Extension length 163

Extensions of a site can also be protected.

site
(ISRKUNDE)
Organizational unit within Retail serving to subdivide an enterprise according to production, procurement, maintenance, and replenishment planning aspects. A site is a place where either articles are produced or goods and services provided.

site class
Retail (ISR)
Grouping together of several sites. The site class is defined in the classification system.

site group
Retail (ISR)
Node in a hierarchy containing further site groups and / or sites.

site map
Logistics Execution (LE)
The site map represents the physical layout of the warehouse using 3D coordinates. It defines the locations of bins, pickup and dropoff points, working areas, zones, and obstacles. The site map delivers the basic information for providing best routes during task execution.

site master record


Retail (ISR)
Data record containing all the important data pertaining to a site.

site wizard
Internet Transaction Server / SAP@Web Studio (BCFESITS)
Dialog in the SAP@Web Studio for creating ITS sites. You use the site wizard to create the server location(s) for publishing the files required by the Internet Transaction Server (ITS) to start a service and drive an application. 164

SIunit
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Explicit unit of measurement which is defined by the International Unitary System for a dimension. (SI in French stands for "systme international des units). Example: Dimension SIunit Length meter Time second Mass kilogram Electric current amp Temperature kelvin Atomic mass or quantity mole Brightness candela

size
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Dimension of a variablesize item, which can be used as a variable in the formula you enter for calculating the variablesize item quantity.

size category
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Table attribute that specifies the amount of space a table is likely to need in the database. You specify the size category in the technical settings of a table.

size level horizon


IndustrySpecific Component Apparel and Footwear (ISAFS)
Period in which MRP plans requirements at SKU level.

skeleton time
Personnel Time Management (PT)
In the standard SAP System, skeleton time is a time account in which paymentrelated times of an employee are managed. 165

Skeleton time is determined in time evaluation. Example: Skeleton time in the standard SAP System consists of: Attendance, absence, and offsite work within a contractual period (start and end of working time) Overtime hours that exceed approved overtime Paid break times

skip
Quality Management (QM)
With a skip, a characteristic in an inspection lot is accepted without inspection on the basis of good quality in the past. If all the inspection characteristics in an inspection lot are skipped, the lot is known as a "skip lot".

SKU data
Basic Data (ISAFSBD)
Grid value and category information about an AFS procurement proposal or requirement. This represents the lowest possible level of information about materials in AFS. If a material has no grid then the category information is also the SKU data and vice versa if no category is assigned to a material.

SKU group
Production Planning and Control (ISAFSPP)

SKU group procedure


Production Planning and Control (ISAFSPP)
Technique in some AFS MRP lot size procedures which uses SKU groups to determine lot sizes.

SKU horizon
Production Planning and Control (ISAFSPP)
Period (from the day's date until the specified number of days into the future) in which AFS MRP carries out planning at SKU level. Requirements outside of the SKU horizon are planned only at material level. Planning at material level and at SKU level in the SKU horizon is carried out separately, that is, requirements at material level cannot be satisfied by procurement at SKU level.

166

SKU level
Basic Data (ISAFSBD)
Refers to AFS planning, procurement proposals or valuation, for example when all applicable grid values or categories are specified. Presizing breaks requirements/procurement proposals down from material level to SKU level, i.e. adds specific grid values and category data to the quantities.

SKU level horizon method 1


Production Planning and Control (ISAFSPP)
MRP search method where MRP only uses stock at material level beyond the SKU level horizon to satisfy requirements within the SKU level horizon at SKU level.

SKU level horizon method 2


Production Planning and Control (ISAFSPP)
MRP search method which allows MRP to allocate stock at SKU level which is beyond the SKU level horizon to requirements before the horizon at SKU level.

SKU quantity adjustment


Production Planning and Control (ISAFSPP)
Function to copy marker or bundle quantities at SKU level to overwrite SKU quantities in AFS planned orders and production orders.

SKU status
Production Planning and Control (ISAFSPP)
Controls AFS discontinued materials at SKU level.

slack time
Production Planning and Control (PP)
The time between the current processing point of an order and the target finish date minus the rest of the processing time.

167

slave graphics proxy


Graphic (BCFESGRA)
When graphics are synchronized with respect to an event the master graphics proxy sends the event to one or more slave graphics proxies.

slider box
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Graphical control element. The slider box is a component of the scroll bar. It specifies the relative position and on some platforms the relative size of the displayed information.

slot
Customer Service (CS)
Subscreen area in the front office screen.

slowmoving item
Logistics Execution (LE)
Material which seldom moves in a warehouse.

slowmoving item
Logistics General (LO)
Material that has been in storage for a while.

small power producer smallscale industry


CrossApplication Components (CA)
In India, a small business that qualifies for reduced rates of excise duty. Businesses qualify as SSIs if, for example, they have less than two premises and a sales volume not exceeding an amount specified by the government.

168

smart card
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Used in a similar way to debit cards except that smart cards carry credit in a microchip placed directly on the card. The credit is often paid for in advance and the amount saved on the card is read and updated by a cardreading apparatus.

Smart Implementation
ReadytoRun R/3 (BCRRR)
Comprehensive technical solution for implementing mySAP.com components quickly and easily. A Smart Implementation has the following advantages: Easy configuration of the system landscape using the Configuration Assistant Automatic installation using the specifications made by the Configuration Assistant Preconfiguration of software components (for example, Web server, ITS instances, configuration of the mySAP.com Workplace) Easy integration into an existing system landscape Basis Customizing of SAP systems SAP Best Practices

smoothing factor
Purchasing (MMPUR)
Value used to control how strongly a current value in a calculation influences the result. The smoothing factor can have a value between 0 and 1. A high smoothing factor changes the results considerably whereas a low one will not make much difference. In vendor evaluation, for example, a smoothing factor is used when an individual score awarded to a vendor for a goods delivery is included in the previously valid overall score for ontime delivery. Since the previous overall score represents the scores from a number of goods receipts and the most recent goods receipt only represents an individual score, the new goods receipt is included with less value, that is to say, it is smoothed.

SNA
Basis Services / Communication Interfaces (BCSRV)
Systems Network Architecture. A widely used communications framework developed by IBM to define network functions and establish standards for enabling its different models of computer to exchange and process data. SNA is essentially a design philosophy that separates network communications into five layers.

169

SNP heuristic
Supply Network Planning (SNP) (APOSNP)
The SNP heuristic performs requirements planning through the entire supply chain network to determine how to satisfy the customer and/or consumer demand. The supply chain is optimized to meet customer service levels, while minimizing inventory levels and synchronizing the flow of material. The heuristic, based on a repairbased planning approach, efficiently plans complex distribution networks in multisite production environments.

SNP optimizer
Supply Network Planning (SNP) (APOSNP)
The SNP optimizer uses the SNP planning model to calculate an optimal plan by applying the following linear optimization techniques based on Simplexbased Algorithms and Branch and Bound methods: Basic Solve The optimizer creates an optimal solution based on all available data. This method is the normal simplex method in which all the variables are continuous. Discrete The optimizer creates an optimal solution based on all available data. This method is the same as Basic Solve, except that some variables can be discretized through the profiles. Transportation is discretized through the lot size profile, and Production is discretized through the production process model. Time Aggregation The optimizer speeds up the solution process by grouping data according to time buckets, solving the problem for the earliest time bucket first, then proceeding sequentially through the remaining time buckets. Product Decomposition The optimizer speeds up the solution process by building groups of products, and solving the problem one product group at a time. Priority Decomposition The optimizer speeds up the solution process by grouping according to priorities. The optimizer solves the highest priority problem first, then proceeds sequentially through the remaining prioritized groups.

Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Transactions


Foreign Trade (SDFT)
System used to transfer letters of credit from bank to bank internationally.

soft phone
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
Softwarebased telephone that is operated via the screen and offers the same function as the hardware version of the telephone. The telephone is displayed as a graphic on the screen.

170

software component
Upgrade General (BCUPG)
Set of software objects that are grouped in development classes and can only be delivered together. There are usually several release versions of a software component. These components are updated by upgrades. You can import Support Packages separately for each software component.

Software Delivery Composer


Online Correction Support (Support Packages) (BCUPGOCS)
Supports the creation of deliveries.

sold circulation
Media Sales and Distribution (ISMSD)
Average number of copies of a title sold individually and as part of subscriptions, taking account of returns.

soldto party
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Person or company that places an order for goods or services. The soldto party can also perform the functions of the payer, billto party or shipto party.

sole and exclusive agent


Commissions (ISISCS)
When an agent is bound exclusively to a particular company.

sole provider
Intercompany Data Exchange (ISUIDE)
Service provider that, from the customer's perspective, is solely responsible for all services, and is the owner of the all receivables contained in the bill.

171

sole sourcing
Purchasing (MMPUR)
Procurement of a material from one particular vendor only, due to the fact that this vendor has a monopoly of the market.

solution
Customer Service (CS)
An action or process that will eliminate a symptom and the problem indicated by the symptom. A solution can be described by freeform text, required actions, or attachments that illustrate and support the required actions. Solutions, along with symptoms, are stored and linked in the SDB. To find a solution, an agent can search the Solution Database from problem notifications as well as from the Customer Interaction Center Front Office.

solution database
Customer Service (CS)
Application offering the ability to store, link, and access problem symptoms and solutions. Agents can locate symptoms by entering freeform text and codes. Because SDB stores custom information, this application can be used by many types of companies in different business scenarios.

Solution Review
AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
In the SAP Review Program, a review of the application design and and business process parameters to be implemented in the R/3 System. The level of detail of the review depends on the project scope and volume of transactions in your enterprise. This review can take place as early as during the Business Blueprint phase.

solution search
Customer Service (CS)
Component in the Customer Interaction Center which enable the agent to directly access the search function of the solution database.

sort

172

Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)


Standard function in R/3. You use this function to sort the entries of a tabular structure in a particular order.

sort buffer
Flow Manufacturing (PPFLW)
Divide a production line into buffered sections, for which you can enter various processes for Sequencing. Thus the sequence of orders in a sort buffer can change You can define a line segment of the line hierarchy as a sort buffer.

sort rule
Batches (LOBM)
Contain characteristics for sorting the batches found by the system during batch determination. You can specify for each characteristic whether batches are to be sorted in ascending or descending order.

sort strategy
Invoice Verification (MMIV)
Procedure giving you the option of defining either the last or the lowest price as the market price within the relevant time period.

sort version
Asset Accounting (FIAA)
A means of defining groups and group totals in asset reports. All fields of the asset master record can be used as group and/or sort criteria for defining a sort version. You enter the sort version key when starting a report.

source
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Product Safety component Link to publicly accessible publications or internal records, for example: Academic publication Journal 173

Book Database Law or regulation Laboratory report Other publications Occupational Health component Legal regulation or other ruling to which a reference value refers.

source
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Legal regulation or other ruling to which a reference value refers.

source allocation
Materials Management (ISAFSMM)
Analyzing tool that supports the evaluation and selection of the appropriate vendors for your material orders. The source allocation uses different selection criteria for this, such as personal and company preferences, import restrictions from a third country, or the capacity situation of the respective vendors. After the optimum vendors have been found, they are written in the purchase requisitions as fixed vendors.

source allocation scheduling logic I


Materials Management (ISAFSMM)
Methodology in the source allocation to check purchase requisitions against the vendor capacity. Thus the system assigns open purchase requisitions one after the other to the open capacities in the first allocation run. All purchase requisitions that are not assigned in the first allocation run are rescheduled en bloc. In a second allocation run the system tries to assign the still open purchase requisitions to the capacity periods that are closest to the originally selected capacity periods. Purchase requisitions that could not be assigned in the second allocation run are again rescheduled en bloc and take part in a third allocation run.

source allocation scheduling logic II


Materials Management (ISAFSMM)
A methodology in the source allocation with which open purchase requisitions are checked for vendor capacity. During this process the system assigns open purchase requisitions to sequentially open capacity periods. Unlike the source allocation scheduling logic I, the system processes one purchase requisition at a time and postpones each individual purchase requisition until it can be assigned to an open capacity period. Only when the first purchase requisition from the list has been assigned, does the system begin with the assignment of the second 174

one. The assignment of the third purchase requistion follows the successful assignment of the second. This process is repeated until all open purchase requisitions have been assigned.

source Business Information Warehouse


SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW)
Business Information Warehouse that is available to additional BW servers as a source system.

source control
Internet Transaction Server / SAP@Web Studio (BCFESITS)
Management of Internet Transaction Server (ITS) files in the R/3 Repository. To protect ITS files against simultaneous modification by several users, you can sourcecontrol the files by checking them into the R/3 Repository. All users have read access to files at any time, but only one user at once is allowed to check out files and modify them.

source determination
Purchasing (MMPUR)
The process of finding sources of supply for a material or group of materials.

source document
Document Management System (CADMS)
An existing document info record, whose basic data you choose to copy. You can copy a source document when you create a new document info record, to reduce your data entry workload.

source document
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Original document in paper form.

source file
Document Management System (CADMS)
Existing file that you copy when you create a new original application file. In Customizing, you define which 175

source file is copied for each combination of data carrier type and workstation application. Example: You create a source file that is a standard letter, containing certain frequentlyused data, such as the address and other text elements.

source inspection
Quality Management (QM)
Acceptance inspection initiated and attended by the customer or soldtoparty or his representative. The source inspection can be carried out by: The party receiving the goods or services The vendor in the presence of the receiving party A third party empowered by the receiving party

source language
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Language in which a phrase was entered together with phrase text.

source list
Purchasing (MMPUR)
List of available sources of supply for a material, indicating the periods during which procurement from such sources is possible. The source list enables you to determine the source that is valid (effective) at a certain point in time.

source list record


Purchasing (MMPUR)
List of available sources of supply for a material, indicating the periods during which procurement from such sources is possible. Every possible source of supply is stored in a source list record, together with its validity period. The source list record uniquely identifies the source of supply (meaning, in the R/3 system, a vendor, an internal plant, or an outline agreement item) and facilitates the determination of the applicable source for a purchase requisition at a certain point in time.

176

source of supply
Purchasing (MMPUR)
Procurement option for a material. A source of supply can be an external source (vendor) or an internal one (for example, a firm's own plant). The preferred source at any one time can be determined by the system on the basis of quota arrangements, source list records, outline agreements (longerterm purchase arrangements) or info records that have been defined for the material.

source planning step


Retail (ISR)
Source of a planning step link.

source release
Upgrade General (BCUPG)
Installed release of an SAP product that is updated to a more recent release with an upgrade.

source storage bin


Logistics Execution (LE)
The storage bin in a warehouse from which a material is taken.

source storage type


Logistics Execution (LE)
The storage type from which the requested quantity is taken. Each source storage type is defined in a special table using the appropriate movement indicator.

source structure
Controlling (CO)
A source structure contains debit cost elements that are settled according to the same apportionment rules. In joint production, for example, this enables you to apportion different material components to the output 177

materials according to different equivalences.

source system
Change Transport System (BCCTS)
R/3 System from which a Repository object is transported into a target system.

source system
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
A system from which data is transferred to an SAP System.

source system
SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW)
System that is made available to the Business Information Warehouse for data extraction.

Sourcing SPACE
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Systemdefined data object. SPACE is a type C constant. It is one character long and contains one blank. Since SPACE is a constant, it cannot be modified.

space category
Real Estate Management (RE)
Categories of space and room object. Two space categories exist: Architectural space category Space category for the usage view. Architectural space category: Characteristics for architectural spaces and rooms. Examples: Main usage area (MUA), subsidiary usage area (SUA), public area (PA), function area (FA), developed areas, undeveloped areas. Space category for the usage view: Timedependent characteristics of rental spaces and rental rooms. Examples: MUA1 MUA7, SUA, PA, FA, parking areas, green area, other undeveloped areas. The field status of the 178

objects is determined by the space category. Space categories can be grouped together. A basis for a category could be landspecific norms or guidelines as well as the specific criteria of the user (see space category group for further information).

space category group


Real Estate Management (RE)
Used to define a group of space categories that are oriented on certain aspects such as countryspecific standards or userdefined criteria.

space factor
Real Estate Management (RE)
A factor that quantifies a space type; normally the dimension is used for this (m2, sqft, etc), but other units of measurement may be used.

space management
Retail (ISR)
Measures used to increase shelf profitability taking account of the assortment and cost of preceding logistics activities.

spacing restriction SPAM/SAINT update


Online Correction Support (Support Packages) (BCUPGOCS)
Contains updates of and improvements to the Support Package Manager and the SAP AddOn Installation Tool.

spare device
Device Management (ISUDM)
Additional device selected in the process of drawing devices for inspection. This device is used when a device selected for inspection is not suitable (due to damage, for example).

spare part

179

Production Planning and Control (PP)


Material used to replace a defective part. This material may or may not be kept in stock. Spare parts are not restored to working condition. Spare parts can be entered in maintenance BOMs. For plant maintenance purposes, spare parts can be assigned to the various operations of an equipment.

Spare Parts Stock Calculation


Rotables Management (ISADROT)

SPEC2K IDoc
Specification 2000 (ISADSPC)
The term SPEC2KIDoc is used for IDocs that have segments containing fields for application document data and data required by the ATA SPEC 2000 specification. The "lower" half of the segment contains the SAP application data, the "upper" half the ATA SPEC 2000 data. In the inbound IDoc, the system initially completes the "upper" segment with the SPEC 2000 data. In the outbound IDoc, the system initially completes the "lower" segment with the SAP application data. Conversion rules ensure that the relevant information from one segment is displayed in the other segment.

special area
HR Manager's Desktop (PAMA)
Theme category in Manager's Desktop. A link on the Manager's Desktop initial screen leads to a working screen displaying functions with related content.

special asset for gain/loss posting


Asset Accounting (FIAA)
Asset master record for the sole purpose of collecting gain and loss resulting from asset retirements. This master record does not reflect an actual existing fixed asset.

special buy agreement


DistributorResellerManagement (ISHTDRM)
A contractual agreement between a distributor/reseller and a manufacturer/supplier applicable at the point of sellin with conditions attached on subsequent resales.

180

A special buy price generally applies to stock procured by a distributor/reseller for resale to a predetermined resale customer specified in a special buy agreement.

special depreciation
Asset Accounting (FIAA)
Depreciation for tax reasons, which is allowed in addition to ordinary depreciation. In general, this form of depreciation allows depreciation by percentage within a tax concession period without taking into account the actual wear and tear on the asset.

special development system


Change Transport System (BCCTS)
System type in an SAP system group from the point of view of the Transport Organizer. With large inhouse development projects, it is sometimes advisable to roll out critical developments to a special development system. To do this, the original system containing the objects must be temporarily changed from the integration system to the special development system.

special G/L account


Financial Accounting (FI)
Reconciliation account for special business transactions in the subledger which should not be balanced with receivables and payables from goods and services. An example of this is a down payment.

special G/L indicator


Financial Accounting (FI)
Indicator that identifies a special G/L transaction. Special G/L transactions include down payments and bills of exchange.

special G/L transaction


Financial Accounting (FI)
Special transactions in accounts receivable and accounts payable that are shown separately in the general ledger and subledger. They include the following: bills of exchange down payments 181

guarantees

special items with reserve


Asset Accounting (FIAA)
Items on the liabilities side of the balance sheet that occur as a result of using special tax depreciation. In many countries, you are permitted to use tax valuations in the balance sheet. However, in order for the origin of values to be clear to the person reading the balance sheet, book depreciation is shown on the assets side of the balance sheet, and the tax depreciation that exceeds it is shown as a special item on the liabilities side of the balance sheet. As a result of the tax deferral effect, these special items have the character of equity, and can therefore be interpreted as special reserves on the liabilities side.

special pay scale group


Human Resource Funds and Position Management (PAPM)
A collection of individual pay scale groups.

special period
Financial Accounting (FI)
Special posting period that divides up the last normal posting period for closing operations.

special processing indicator


Sales and Distribution (SD)
Indicates that a particular form of processing is used for transportation or a special form of calculation is used for freight costs. Examples of special processing are express shipping or special tarifs.

special procurement type


Material Requirements Planning (PPMRP)
An indicator in the material master record that defines external procurement or inhouse production of the material more precisely. Examples of possible special procurement types are: Consignment 182

Stock transfer Production in another plant

special provisions
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Rules for special situations that arise when transporting dangerous goods. Special provisions are entered, for example, in the IATA dangerous goods list and in 49 CFR.

special provisions
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Rules for special situations that arise when transporting dangerous goods. Special provisions are entered, for example, in the IATA dangerous goods list and in 49 CFR.

special publication
Advertising Management (ISMAM)
Characteristics that describe independent publications that can be inserted or bound in newspapers and magazines. These types of independent publications include special publications such as New Models for Spring, East Coast Lifestyle or Youth. Content components of the special publication type must be assigned to the first level of the content component hierarchy. Special publications can have columns. Ads that are placed in special publications do not usually have a particular design type.

Special Purpose Ledger


Special Purpose Ledger (FISL)
Application used for customerdefined ledgers, which contain information for reporting purposes. The customerdefined ledger can be used as the general ledger or as a subledger and may contain the account assignments desired. The account assigments can be either SAP dimensions from various applications or customerdefined dimensions. Example SAP dimension: account, business area, profit center Customer defined dimension: region

183

special service
Sales and Distribution (ISAFSSD)
A procedure in which you handle goods separately before the delivery, corresponding to the requirements of your customers. Example: Hanging garments on hangers.

special status
Cable Solution (CAB)
A status indicator that is set for a drum that is in the process of being transferred. Depending on the settings in Customizing, this drum may not be available for use elsewhere.

special stock
Inventory Management (MMIM)
Stocks of materials that have to be managed separately for reasons of ownership or factors involving the location at which they are kept (for example, consignment stocks from vendors).

special stock indicator


Inventory Management (MMIM)
Indicator defining the special nature of a stock of materials. The indicator may have the following values: "K" for vendor consignment stock "O" for stock of material provided to vendor "W" for consignment stock with customer "E" for sales order stock "Q" for project stock "V" for returnable packaging stock with customer "M" for returnable transport packaging "P" for pipeline material

special text variable


Special Purpose Ledger (FISL)
Type of text variable that provides information from master data files associated with characteristics used in a report.

184

special transport
Change Transport System (BCCTS)
Transports that do not follow the usual transport routes. Special transports include the following request types: Transports of copies Relocations

specialization
Data Modeler (BCDWBTOODMO)
Concept that enables the formation of entity types. There are a number of ways to specialize an entity type. The criterion used for the specialization is defined by the specialization category. Specializations are linked by the specialization category to the source entity type (that is, the generalization).

specialization
Data Modeler (BCDWBTOODMO)
Concept that allows the formation of subcategories for entity types. An entity type can be specialized in many ways. The criterion for specialization is the specialization type. Specializations are linked to the source entity type (= generalization) through the specialization category.

specific download
Consolidation (ECCS)
Download of organizational units from an SAP consolidation system into a front end system for the purpose of decentralized PC data entry on the basis of Microsoft Access. A specific download usually includes hierarchies, consolidation groups and consolidation units.

specific exemption
(CATTE)
Freedom from tax obligation that is applicable to transactions of a particular type. Note Any company claiming a specific exemption must have an exemption license.

185

specific header
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
Information about a folder or document depending on the type involved. Example of a SAPscript text document (type SCR): Layout set Style Line width

specific inflation gain or loss


Financial Accounting (FI)
In inflation accounting, an expense or revenue that arises when you adjust an item using a specific inflation index.

specific inflation index


Financial Accounting (FI)
An inflation index that reflects the change in the price of a particular commodity or goods, for example, gold, as opposed to the general inflation index. In inflation accounting, some governments may require some goods to be adjusted using a specific index instead of the general index.

specific questionnaire
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Questionnaire that is assigned to a specific object.

specific transit time


Retail (ISR)
Time required from the shipping point to reach a specific goods recipient along a route.

specification
Product Data Management (LOPDM)
Detailed description for a component for production or procurement that has a specific task in a techincal system 186

(product or installation). The component is used without a concrete assembly structure (BOM) for the individual components. The description is based on data cheets that are created for each project using templates as well as documents and drawings.

specification
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Description using identifiers and value assignments such as physicalchemical properties, medical notes, and details on transport and storage. You can manage specifications for different specification categories, for example, specifications for: Substances Agents Packaging Waste codes Dangerous goods classifications Depending on the specification type, you can assign any number of materials to a specification and therefore use a specification as often as you require.

specification category
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Highestlevel grouping of specifications. In the SAP component Product Safety, you can manage specifications for various specification categories, for example, specifications for: Substances Agents Packaging Waste codes Dangerous goods classifications Each specification category is further subdivided into numerous specification types. For example, for the specification category substance you can manage specifications of the specification types listed substance, real substance, and so on.

specification limit
Quality Management (QM)
Minimum or maximum value. Specification limits allow the user to decide whether a characteristic value is to be accepted or rejected during the inspection of quantitative characteristics. 187

specification reference
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Reference from a specification to one or more other specifications (specification references) in order to transfer the value assignments from the specification references to the referencing specification. If a value assignment type for a referencing specification is maintained directly, the reference is deactivated for this property and the specification then carries its own "private" value assignment.

specification system
Product Data Management (LOPDM)
Support tool for the engineering process to describe components for production or procurement These include: Maintenance and management of templates (for types of components) Maintenance and management of data sheets (for projectspecific components based on templates) You can manage different versions of templates and data sheets.

specification type
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Grouping of specifications on the basis of certain criteria. Specification types can be assigned depending on the specification category: Examples: Specification types for the specification category substance: Real substance Listed substance Real substance group Listed substance group Copy template Specification types for the specification category agent: Noise Radiation Psychological factors Material Real substance

188

specifications document
(CRMMT)
A document that contains the requirements that should be implemented in a mobile client application. It can contain: 1)Business requirements For example, in the application, I want to view the list of orders generated in a continent. 2)Screen changes For example, include a field in the Search screen. 3)Technical changesFor example, model the BOCAPGEN business object and bind its properties to the corresponding controls in the Customer tile.

specimen
Quality Management (QM)
Material unit that is subjected to inspection for a specific reason, or that is needed in a quality inspection.

spending limit
(BBPWFL)
The value from which a shopping cart requires approval.

spin off
Application Components (SAP)
Establish part of a company as a separate enterprise and sell it.

split
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
The split indicator describes the quantity split within the period that has been chosen with the breakdown indicator. Mostly the choice is: Split according to working days per period Split equally according to number of periods 189

split
Production Planning and Control (PP)
To achieve more detailed planning of resources and commitments, you can subdivide capacities into individual capacities (for example, individual machines) for which you can maintain available capacities. You can allocate or dispatch capacity requirements to these individual capacities in either of the two planning tables.

split indicator
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
When a quantity schedule is broken down into periods using a scheduling indicator, the split indicator indicates whether the quantity is to be distributed over all the periods equally or according to the number of workdays.

split indicator
Payroll (PY)
Entry in table RT that enables several specifications for one wage type. The split indicator is a key for reading the corresponding values for another table. Example: An employee must pay two garnishment amounts. Table RT contains the garnishment wage type with different split indicators. The accompanying table for garnishments contains the amounts that belong to the split indicators.

split invoice
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
Split invoicing allows fees, product values and excise duties to be separated by splitting purchase invoices.

split invoicing
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
Type of invoicing which allows the creation of up to nine invoices with various terms of payment for a delivery. For example, split invoices can be created for net price, fees, taxes, etc.

split length
Cable Solution (CAB)
This length splits the requirement quantity into individual lengths. It can be a standard length from the material 190

master record or a length specified by the user.

split remainder
Logistics Execution (LE)
The part of the original delivery left over after the delivery split.

split results
Logistics Execution (LE)
Deliveries that were created during a delivery split. The passive remnants of the original delivery become the split remainder and the active, newlycreated deliveries become the split results.

split revaluation of depreciation


Asset Accounting (FIAA)
In Inflation Accounting, a distinction between the following: The revaluation of the current month's depreciation amount The revaluation of the depreciation amounts already posted in the current year Some countries require you to record these two types of revaluation on separate G/L accounts, others do not.

split valuation
Invoice Verification (MMIV)
Option allowing stocks of a single material within a plant to be managed in different stock accounts in terms of value. Different stocks of the same material can thus be valuated separately. Example: Some stocks of a certain material may be procured externally, whereas others are produced inhouse. Using split valuation, you can assign your "boughtout" stocks to different accounts to your "madein" stocks and valuate the former at different prices to the latter. Such stocks can also be subject to different types of price control.

splitscreen editor
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Tool for comparing two different programs. The splitscreen editor allows you to display and/or edit the source code of two programs side by side (even if they reside in different systems). 191

The splitscreen editor contains some of the standard functions available in the ABAP Editor, as well as some special splitscreen functions.

splitter
Graphic (BCFESGRA)
A multipurpose splitter control that takes the Windows output of the controls and displays them in a grid. The areas can be resized relative to one another.

splitting
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Splitting is where an operation is divided into several parallel processing steps. An operation can be split, for example, if it is processed simultaneously by several machines or if it is executed by several people.

spoilage
Retail (ISR)
Goods (such as fresh produce) that are no longer suitable for sale because they have been stored wrongly or for too long a period.

sponsor
Public Sector IndustrySpecific Component (ISPS)
Business partner involved with a grantee organization in the sponsoring of programs through business contracts defined as grants.

Sponsored Program Management


Public Sector IndustrySpecific Component (ISPS)
This is the component of ISPS developed to account for grants from government and other bodies for the purpose of, for example, commercial or scientific research.

spool

192

Cable Solution (CAB)


The winding of cable from one drum to another.

spool administration
Print and Output Management (BCCCMPRN)
Tool for managing the spool system.

spool request
Print and Output Management (BCCCMPRN)
Record created when information is sent to a printer or other output device. A spool request contains details about the request and a copy of the information.

spool server
Print and Output Management (BCCCMPRN)
R/3 application server on which one or more spool work processes run. A formatting server prepares the data for forwarding to the operating system spool system.

spool system
Print and Output Management (BCCCMPRN)
Component for outputting SAPscript texts and ABAP lists. The SAP spool system is part of the Computing Center Management Systems (CCMS).

spool work process


Print and Output Management (BCCCMPRN)
Work process that is set up on an SAP application server. Spool work processes format print data and passes it to the spool system of the underlying operating system, which sends it to an output device for printing.

193

spot exchange transaction


Treasury Management (TRTM)
Binding agreement for the immediate exchange of foreign exchange. The currency is usually credited/delivered 2 days after closing operations.

spot price
Energy Data Management (ISUEDM)
Price charged for energy on the spot market.

spot rate
Treasury Management (TRTM)
The spot rate is the officially fixed rate/price of a foreign currency or security at which the maximum volume of trade possible is achieved.

spot rate
Treasury Management (TRTM)
The spot rate is the rate/price fixed officially for a currency or security at which the largest volume of trade is achieved.

spot rate method of currency translation


Consolidation (FILC)
One method of currency translation. This method distinguishes between the 'straight spotrate method' and the 'modified spotrate method': Straight spotrate method All the balance sheet and income statement item amounts in foreign currency are translated into group currency on the closing reporting date using the exchange rate valid on that date. Since this a straight translation of values from one currency to another, there are no currency translation differences. Because of the uniform translation using the spot (current) exchange rate, the structures of the balance sheets and income statements of the consolidated individual statements remain unchanged. Modified spotrate method 194

There are several forms of the modified spotrate method. The most recommended modified method is where the income statement is viewed as a time period statement and is not translated using the spot rate but rather using the rate valid at the time the transaction took place or, to simplify things, an average rate on a yearly, quarterly or monthly basis. Another modified method involves the translation of equity values. Instead of the spot rate, a historical rate can be proposed in order to prevent, among other things, the translation from affecting the consolidation of investments.

spot rate method of currency translation


Consolidation (FILC)
This is one method of currency translation. Within this method there is a difference between the 'pure spot rate method' and the 'modified spot rate method': pure spot rate method All the balance sheet and income statement item amounts in foreign currency are translated into reporting currency on the closing reporting date using the exchange rate valid on that date. As this a straight translation of values from one currency to another, there are no currency translation differences. When using a standard spot rate for the translation, the asset and income structures of the individual financial statements to be included in the consolidation remain unchanged. modified spot rate method There are several forms of the modified spot rate method. That which occurs most often is one where the income statement is not translated according to the spot rate but rather with the rate valid at the time the transaction took place (to simplify this, an average rate on a yearly, quarterly or monthly basis is used). A further modification is used for the translation of equity values. Instead of a spot rate, a historical rate is used to prevent, amongst other things, the translation affecting the consolidation of investments.

spread
Treasury Management (TRTM)
Used in connection with the credit standing of the debtor as a markup of a reference interest rate for reference interest ratedependent derivative financial transactions. Also describes the difference between the bid rate and the ask rate.

195

spread
Financial Accounting (FI)
Fixed difference between the spot rate and the buy rate or between the spot rate and the offer rate.

spread clause
Real Estate Management (RE)
German law Agreement for the rent adjustment of business premises between the landlord and tenant. It stipulates that the rent is adjusted in line with the rent changes of comparative business premises (location, type, size) and that the landlord does not have to get the approval of the tenant for the rental adjustment.

SQL report
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Executable program that is not linked to a logical database. An SQL report consists of ABAP Open SQL statements and may also have a selection screen.

SQL trace
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Performance trace function for monitoring and analyzing SQL statements used in reports and transactions.


IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
Function used in the area of logical inventory adjustment (LIA); (the term "unlike product exchange", or UPE means the same thing as LIA). The logical inventory is posted, which is an offset posting to the actual (physical) deliveries. The three functions or posting transactions in a LIA document are the posting of the logical inventory (book delivery), the posting of the logical stock received (book receipt) and the posting of the negotiated payment (book negotiated payment).

SSF profile
196

Security (BCSEC)
Information in the SAP System where a user or component's private part of the publickey information is stored (the private key). The SSF profile may be a file or any other information specifying the publickey information. The exact form of the profile depends on the security product that you use.

SSO cookie
Security (BCSEC)
Information stored in the user's Web browser and used for authentication in the mySAP.com Workplace.

SSO Personal Security Environment


Security (BCSEC)
The Personal Security Environment (PSE) used for Single SignOn (SSO) in the mySAP.com Workplace when using the mySAP.com logon ticket. The mySAP.com Workplace Server uses its SSO PSE to digitally sign users' logon tickets issued for Single SignOn in the Workplace. The mySAP.com component systems use their SSO PSEs to verify the Workplace Server's digital signature when users access the component system.

SSO ticket
Security (BCSEC)
Authentication token used in the mySAP.com Workplace for Single SignOn (SSO). The SSO ticket is issued to the user by the central Workplace Server. It is then verified by the Workplace component systems to allow the user access without having to reenter his or her user ID and password. The authenticity of the SSO ticket is protected with the central Workplace Server's digital signature.

Example
When a user logs on to the mySAP.com Workplace, he or she must authenticate him or herself on the central Workplace Server using a user ID and password. After successful authentication, the central Workplace Server issues the user his or her SSO ticket, which is stored in the SSO cookie in the user's Web browser. When the user access a Workplace component system, the SSO cookie (which contains the user's SSO ticket) is sent to the component system where it is unpacked and verified. If the verification is successful, the user is allowed access to the system.

stable value clause

197

Real Estate Management (RE)


German law The linking of rent changes to a specific index. The land central bank must authorize this.

stack height
Logistics Execution (LE)
Maximum number of standard pallets that can be stacked for a particular material. Pallets are usually stored in stacks in the block storage area.

stacking factor
Supply Network Planning (SNP) (APOSNP)
Indicates how many pallets can be stacked on a particular floor spot in in a transport vehicle. (See also 'floor spots.')

staff assignment
Human Resource Funds and Position Management (PAPM)
A position is filled by being assigned to an internal or external commission contract partner. During the filling process, the system checks whether the job description and the filling agreement in the commission contract fit together.

staff assignments
Organizational Plan (PAOS)
Represents the assignment of positions to orgnizational units and the relationship between positions and holder (employees or R/3 users).

staff indicator
Organizational Plan (PAOS)
Indicates that an organizational unit or position is not part of the normal organizational structure or reporting structure at your firm. Rather, the organizational unit or position reports directly to a highlevel position or unit. This could occur if a company has an internal audit department, for example. An internal audit department often operates independently, and reports directly to the CEO or Board of Directors.

198

staffing assignments
Organizational Plan (PAOS)
Represents the assignment of positions to organizational units and the relationship between positions and holders (employees or R/3 users).

staffing percentage
Human Resource Funds and Position Management (PAPM)
The proportion of an employee's working time assigned to a specific position. Example: A working time of 20 hours per week is defined for an employee. A staffing percentage of 100% is defined for this employee and a specific position. This means that the person devotes 20 hours per week to performing the tasks relating to this position.

staffing percentage
Recruitment (PARC)
Shows what percentage of a vacancy is occupied by one or more applicants.

staging
Product catalog (CRMMDPCT)
Work version in product catalog management that enables you to change product catalog contents which have already been published. Changes are published after being released.

Staging
SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW)
A process that prepares (stages) data in a Data Warehouse.

staging area
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Organizational unit on a hierarchial level below a warehouse. Staging areas are used for the intermediate storage of goods in the warehouse. They are near the relevant doors. 199

Each staging area can be defined for more than one purpose: Goods receipt for the temporary storage of unloaded goods until they are physically received Goods issue for the temporary storage of picked goods until they are physically loaded

staging area
DistributorResellerManagement (ISHTDRM)
Initial storage area for all data transmitted by EDI by a distributor/reseller to a manufacturer/ supplier. In the staging area, items can be maintained and any transmission errors can be corrected. The system is updated when a user releases an item (for example sales return information) from the staging area.

staging type
Logistics Execution (LE)
Method that is used to request the required materials for a production supply area. Examples: Pick parts Materials that are made available in accordance with the quantities specified in the production order. Crate parts These materials are stored in crates or other standard containers. They are supplied, irrespective of existing production orders. Release order parts These parts are supplied manually based upon the requirements in the production orders, the stock quantities in the production supply areas, and the quantities available in the replenishment areas.

stakeholder
Stakeholder Relationship Management (SEMSRM)
Organization or individual, that has a specific interest in an enterprise and expects that this interest will be taken into account during strategic decisions. Stakeholders mainly belong to one (or several) of the following groups: Investors (Shareholders) 200

Customers Employees State or public institutions Business partners

standalone scenario
Procurement (EBP)
One of the scenarios possible for Enterprise Buyer professional edition. In this scenario, there is no Materials Management functionality in the ERP system. Instead, the Materials Management functions in Enterprise Buyer are used for procurement of nonproduction materials.

standard activity agreement


Commissions (ISISCS)
Standard layout of the activity agreement in the commission contract.

standard admission
IndustrySpecific Component for Hospitals (ISH)
Most complete form of admitting a patient into a hospital. The standard admission procedure is basically identical for the inpatient and outpatient areas.

standard agreement
Commissions (ISISCS)
Standard version of an agreement in the commission contract.

standard allocation rule


Retail (ISR)
Rule used in stock allocation when the stock split among stores is to be allocated in the same proportions, thus allowing the process to be automated.

standard application for commission


201

Commissions (ISISCS)
Group of minimum components used for generating a commission module. A minimum level of data dictionary objects and related screens, programs and functions is required as a generation template.

standard available capacity


Production Planning and Control (PP)
The standard available capacity refers to the available capacity of a certain capacity category. It is valid if no interval of available capacity has been defined. The standard available capacity is specified by entering: the work start time the work finish time the breaks the rate of capacity utilization

standard BOM
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Bill of material that is used internally only in the following areas: Plant maintenance Standard networks The components of a standard BOM represent frequently occurring structures that are not objectdependent, and can be allocated to the activities in a projectindependent standard network.

standard buffer
Flow Manufacturing (PPFLW)
Element of the line hierarchy. You can insert a standard buffer in the line hierarchy to display, for example, an interim production store in the system. The standard buffer has, however, no effect on scheduling, but simply serves documentation.

standard capacity
Master Data (APOMD)
Capacity that is permanently valid for a resource. Any variance from this capacity can be maintained as a capacity variant.

202

standard class
Archive Development Kit (BCCCMADK)
Set of Archive Development Kit (ADK) function modules used to copy data from the program to archiving, or copy data back to the program when archived data is read or reloaded. These methods are available for every logical object of related business data defined in the system (see also "archiving object").

standard class
Classification System (CACL)
Default class for an object. If you want to access classification data for an object, and you do not enter a specific class, the standard class defined for the object is used.

standard commission contract


Commissions (ISISCS)
Standard version of the commission contract containing the global contractual agreements.

standard communication method


Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
The communication method by which documents are sent to an address stored in the SAP System, provided a different communication method is not explicitly specified. If a business partner wants to correspond with SAP by fax, the standard communication method Fax is specified for his or her address. This business partner receives messages for which he or she is specified as the recipient as faxes.

standard condition
Bank Components (ISB)
Crosstransaction conditions, for which variable transactions and transactionindependent valuation can be stored in a conditions list.

standard cost
203

Product Cost Controlling (COPC)


Cost that is based on an activity unit and that remains stable over a relatively long period of time. For example, the standard cost of a material can remain stable for a year. A standard cost is essentially a norm that should not be exceeded.

standard cost estimate


Product Cost Controlling (COPC)
The most important type of cost estimate in material costing. Forms the basis for profit planning or product costing where the emphasis is on determining the variances. A standard cost estimate for each product is usually created once at the beginning of the fiscal year or new season. Standard cost estimates calculate the standard prices for semifinished products and finished products. The costs calculated in standard cost estimates are used to valuate materials with standard price control.

standard domain
Email, Fax, and Telephony Interfaces (BCSRVCOM)
Domain of Internet mail addresses that is used to generate Internet addresses for users and business objects. Internet addresses are generated automatically when users or business objects to which no Internet address is assigned send an Internet message.

standard feature
Personnel Management (PA)
Feature included in standard SAP System. A standard feature is determined by the "Activate Features" report (RPUMKG00) in the features generator. Standard features are defined, activated, and set to a standard client in the feature generator. Usually, this is client 000. It is important for the standard feature that the client is specified in the above report. If the client in the customer system does not match the client set by the feature generator, the client can be modified accordingly in the generator.

standard folder
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
A folder for storing a user's favourite objects. Standard folders are created for users by system adminstrators. Users can organize their favourite objects in these folders, but cannot change the folders.

204

standard hierarchy
ActivityBased Costing (COOMABC)
Tree structure for organizing the business processes belonging to a controlling area from the Controlling (CO) standpoint. A business process is assigned to an end node of the standard hierarchy during master data maintenance of the business process. This ensures that the standard hierarchy contains all business processes in the controlling area. When you create a controlling area, you specify the name of the highest node of the standard hierarchy in that controlling area.

standard hierarchy
Cost Center Accounting (COOMCCA)
Tree structure containing all the cost centers in a controlling area from the Controlling (CO) standpoint. You assign a cost center to an end node of the standard hierarchy in the master data maintenance of the cost center, or in the enterprise organization. This ensures that the standard hierarchy contains all the cost centers in that controlling area. When you define the controlling area, you specify the name of the top node of the standard hierarchy in that controlling area.

standard industry sector


Logistics Basic Data (LOMD)
Industry sector defined in the standard SAP R/3 System. Examples of standard industry sectors are mechanical engineering and plant engineering and construction.

standard job
Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
Periodic jobs in a productive SAP System. Usually housekeeping.

standard key
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Key of a table that consists of the individual key fields.

205

standard layout
Special Purpose Ledger (FISL)
Parameters that determine the layout features of a report. A standard layout provides default values for parameters, which can be overwritten in the report. Example: Standard layout parameters can include: General format parameters (page length, page width) Row total parameters Row text parameters Column total parameters Column text parameters Languagedependent parameters

standard length
Cable Solution (CAB)
Length of cable that is favored for general use and delivery purposes.

standard length split


Cable Solution (CAB)
The division of the order quantity into multiples of the preferred standard length. The preferred standard length can be entered in the CS data of the material master record. If the order quantity is not an exact multiple of the preferred standard length, an individual length item is generated for the remaining quantity.

standard maintenance routing


Plant Maintenance (PM)
Standardized sequence of operations for carrying out particular maintenance work on technical objects. The standard maintenance routing is not linked with a particular technical object. A standard maintenance routing contains all the operations, materials and maintenance resources that are needed for a particular maintenance task. Standard maintenance routings help the work scheduling of maintenance orders. Above all, they make the creation of maintenance plans easier, as you can either refer to them in the maintenance plan or copy them into it.

206

standard material type


Logistics Basic Data (LOMD)
Material type defined in the standard SAP R/3 System. Examples of standard material types are raw materials, semifinished products, and finished products.

standard length
Cable Solution (CAB)
Length of cable that is favored for general use and delivery purposes.

standard length split


Cable Solution (CAB)
The division of the order quantity into multiples of the preferred standard length. The preferred standard length can be entered in the CS data of the material master record. If the order quantity is not an exact multiple of the preferred standard length, an individual length item is generated for the remaining quantity.

standard maintenance routing


Plant Maintenance (PM)
Standardized sequence of operations for carrying out particular maintenance work on technical objects. The standard maintenance routing is not linked with a particular technical object. A standard maintenance routing contains all the operations, materials and maintenance resources that are needed for a particular maintenance task. Standard maintenance routings help the work scheduling of maintenance orders. Above all, they make the creation of maintenance plans easier, as you can either refer to them in the maintenance plan or copy them into it.

standard material type


Logistics Basic Data (LOMD)
Material type defined in the standard SAP R/3 System. Examples of standard material types are raw materials, semifinished products, and finished products.

207

standard milestone
Project System (PS)
A standard milestone is a milestone with limited functions. It is used only as a template for creating milestones in the Project System.

standard model
Work Clearance Management (PMWCM)
Model structure that defines the relationships between the following work clearance management objects: Work clearance application Operational work clearance document Use of the standard model is advisable if lockout/tagout is of primary importance and other safety measures, such as radiation protection, safety in the workplace and fire protection, play a less significant role.

standard module
Retail (ISR)
Assortment module normally used for materials that are to be listed on a relatively longterm basis in the same way (for example, brand name goods).

standard network
Project System (PS)
Standard networks are network structures which are not directly associated with any one project and can be used as templates for creating new networks. Standard networks are used in projects for frequently occurring processes or for planning processes in other areas.

standard object
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Model object, the structure of which repeats itself and is represented globally (without reference to an object) using a standard BOM. No master record is maintained for a standard object in the R/3 System. The standard BOM, which is plantindependent, contains components which can be allocated to the activities in a projectindependent standard network. 208

standard of valuation for panel physician services


IndustrySpecific Component for Hospitals (ISH)
Standard of valuation for panel physician services based on 87 Section 1 SGB V (German Social Security Code).

standard offer standard operating procedure


Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Instructions and technical information provided for employees by the operators or users of installations, technical equipment, working procedures, substances, or preparations with the aim of avoiding accidents and reducing health risks. This also includes the protection of property and the environment. When standard operating procedures are produced, the required safepractice directives in the appropriate industrial hygiene and safety and accident prevention regulations, as well as safetyrelated and occupational health rules, and any special handling advice provided by the manufacturer in operating instructions must be taken into account.

standard option
Treasury Management (TRTM)
In foreign exchange trading, a standard option is the right to buy or sell a currency at a price fixed in the contract (strike price) on a specified expiry date or at any time before the expiry of a specified exercise period.

standard overview
Production Planning and Control (PP)
A type of evaluation used in capacity planning. For every work center and the capacities defined for it, the system compares the total of capacity requirements with the available capacity per period.

standard pallet
Logistics Execution (LE)
A particular quantity of a material in stockkeeping units stored on a pallet. On the basis of the standard pallet size, the system automatically proposes splitting incoming materials into multiples of this size for stock placement.

209

standard plan
Benefits (PABN)
A plan in which employees are automatically enrolled.

standard planning layout


Controlling (CO)
Planning layout predefined by SAP and differentiated according to planning areas.

standard price
Invoice Verification (MMIV)
Constant price at which a material is valuated without taking goods movements and invoices into account.

standard price procedure


Invoice Verification (MMIV)
Procedure for material valuation. With the standard price procedure, all quantity movements are valuated at the valuation price in the material master record. Price variances at the time of goods/invoice receipt are posted via the price difference accounts.

standard product
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Product involving a large number of variants. The product is represented by a bill of material. The BOM of a standard product contains both components that are used in all variants and selectable components. Components can be selected on the basis of the values you assign to the configuration parameters (characteristics of a class that is allocated to the product) and the object dependencies you allocate to the product. When you configure the product, the assigned values are automatically checked for consistency and completeneww.

standard project

210

Project System (PS)


A standard project is a generic project structure, which can be used repeatedly and serves as a template for creating new projects.

standard project definition


Project System (PS)
The standard project definition is the binding framework for all objects which are created in a standard project. The standard project definition has data which is binding for the entire standard project, such as organization data.

standard purchase order


Retail (ISR)
Purchase order type with which a purchase order is issued to an external vendor or a plant belonging to a different company code.

standard recipient
Construction Equipment Management (ISECCEM)
A fictitious recipient whose CEM settlement data is valid for a group of recipients during CEM settlement. This entails less maintenance when you want to change the control parameters. You only need to make the changes in the master record of the fictitious recipient (standard recipient) and the changes will take effect for all recipients in the group as of the next settlement run.

standard remuneration clearing agreement


Commissions (ISISCS)
Standard version of the remuneration clearing agreement. It is generally applied only to the individual remuneration belonging to the commission contract in question. Within a (standard) commission contract, exactly one remuneration clearing agreement applies. The standard remuneration clearing agreement is contained in the commission system as a standard agreement with its own agreement category.

standard report
Reporting (BCSRVREP)
Report delivered with the standard system. 211

standard report
Consolidation (FILC)
Standard reports arrange group or company data in table or list form. The following are examples of standard reports: Balance sheet/Income statement with year/version comparison Changes in balance sheet/income statement Asset history sheet, reserve report Sales revenue by region/profit center The layout and content of a standard report are freely definable but must be fully specified before or when a report is called up. Standard reports can be created on screen, as a printout, or as an automatic extract. A more dynamic analysis of Consolidation data can be achieved using onscreen Interactive Reporting.

standard request
Change Transport System (BCCTS)
Change request that is indicated by the developer as being the request under which all changes are automatically recorded. By defining a standard request, the dialog box regarding the change request query becomes inapplicable when saving developments.

standard selection
Benefits (PABN)
A customerdefined list of plans that are to be offered as standard plans.

standard selection screen


Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Selection screen automatically generated and called by the system when you run an ABAP report program.

standard selection variant


Basic Data (PPBD)
Selection variant that the Engineering Workbench automatically uses, provided you have not entered another selection variant.

212

standard sequence
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Sequence of operations which describes a production process and from which parallel and alternative sequences can branch. The first sequence of operations maintained in a routing is automatically stored as the standard sequence.

standard service catalog


External Services (MMSRV)
General, standardized catalog of text modules used to describe services. The standard service catalog (SSC) represents one way of storing service descriptions as master data without redundancy. Frequently used parts of service descriptions are stored in standard service catalogs in the form of individual text modules. The complete description of a certain service is compiled from different text modules. A maximum of six such modules can be used in the process. Each text module has a number. The standard service catalog number, (SSC number), uniquely defining a certain service, is made up of the numbers of the individual text modules. SSC numbers can be used for the speedy creation of service specifications in purchasing documents. Standard service catalogs can be subdivided into various service types to reflect particular trades or special groups of activities (such as masonry work, maintenance or servicing, or cleaning services), for instance. An SSC number also contains the numbers of the service type and of the standard service catalog edition. That is to say, the complete number comprises the following components: Service type number Edition Numbers of the text modules necessary to fully describe the service.

standard service number


External Services (MMSRV)
Key identifying a certain external service. Frequently used parts of service descriptions are stored in standard service catalogs (SSCs) in the form of individual text modules, each of which has a separate number. A standard service number may also be referred to as a standard service catalog number, or SSC number, and comprises the year of issue (edition year) of the standard service catalog, the service type, and the numbers of the text modules required to completely describe the service. A maximum of six text modules can be used for this 213

purpose. SSC numbers facilitate the speedy compilation of service specifications in purchasing documents.

standard setting
Customizing Tools (Techniques) (BCCUSTOL)
Entries made in tables by SAP and delivered to customers who can use the delivered data in various ways: as example data to understand a function as template for customerspecific adjustment of a function in production processing

standard symbol
SAPscript (BCSRVSCR)
Placeholder used in the SAPscript editor. At runtime, standard symbols are replaced with values that can be defined freely in the various applications.

standard task
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Singlestep task for use in workflow definitions. You can execute methods of business object types in standard tasks. The following apply to standard tasks: Object type TS in Organizational Management Crossclient Unrestricted validity period Any plan version

Standard text
Production Planning for Process Industries (PPPI)
Frequently used, standard operating procedure that you enter independent of a recipe or order. You can use standard texts as templates to create your own long texts for operations, phases, or secondary resources.

214

standard text variable


Special Purpose Ledger (FISL)
Type of text variable that can be entered directly for report text. The system calculates the value for the variable based on current system records. Examples: Author of report Date of report creation Time of report creation

standard toolbar
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Element of the graphical user interface. The standard toolbar is located below the menu bar and extends across the full width of the primary window. The standard toolbar contains pushbuttons for common functions like "Save", as well as navigation and help functions. To the right of the ENTER pushbutton, the standard toolbar also contains the command field for entering R/3 System commands.

standard toolbar
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Element of the graphical user interface. The standard toolbar contains pushbuttons that give users access to common functions like "Save", "Back", "Exit", and "Cancel", as well as navigation and help functions. To the right of the ENTER button, you can also find the command field for entering R/3 System commands. The standard toolbar is located below the menu bar and extends across the full width of the primary window.

standard trigger point


Production Planning and Control (PP)
A standard trigger point is a reference object used to create trigger points. By using standard trigger points you can minimize the effort involved in creating trigger points.

215

standard valuation
Consolidation (ECCS)
Valuation of the reported financial data of all consolidation units according to standard valuation criteria specified by corporate policy. This is achieved by posting standardizing entries to the financial data of the consolidation units, either decentrally in the operational systems or centrally in the consolidation system.

standard valuation
Consolidation (FILC)
Valuation of the individual financial statements of all group companies according to standard valuation criteria specified by corporate policy. This is achieved by posting standardizing entries to the individual financial statements of group companies, either decentrally in the accounting systems of the group companies or centrally in the consolidation system.

standard value
Production Planning and Control (PP)
A standard value is a planned value for the execution of an operation. It can be estimated or calculated using the CAPP standard value calculation. Standard values are used in costing, scheduling and capacity planning to calculate costs, execution times and capacity requirements.

standard variant
Engineering Change Management (LOECH)
Parameter variant that you save under a name in order to be able to use it later.

standard view
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
User's view on the integrated inbox with the work items to which they are directly assigned as an agent.

standard volume

216

Gas Billing (ISUBISFGA)


Volume of the gas quantity under the following standard physical conditions: Standard temperature (Ts) = 273.15 K Standard pressure (Ps) = 1.01325 bars

standardized financial data


Consolidation (ECCS)
Financial data which meets the group's accounting guidelines. Standardized financial data is typically created by standardizing entries involving the reported financial data.

standardizing entry
Consolidation (FILC)
A journal entry made to the financial data of companies being consolidated, in order to bring this data into line with corporate standards. Standardizing entries can be made locally by the individual subsidiaries, however, the standardizing entries required from the group point of view are not known to the subsidiary, and are therefore only made in the Consolidation system. If the subsidiary reports its data in local currency, then the standardizing entry will also be made in local currency. The individual financial statement data and standardizing entries for the subsidiary are then translated into group currency during currency translation. In the FILC System, standardizing entries are stored separately from the reported financial statement data in special data records. This makes it possible to analyze each type of data separately. Entries which post to both the balance sheet and income statement can cause an adjustment to net income that is calculated automatically in the Consolidation system. This can lead to the allocation of deferred taxes.

standardizing entry
Consolidation (ECCS)
A journal entry used for adjusting the reported financial data so that it meets the standards required for the corporate group. Standardizing entries can be made to the reported financial data decentrally by the individual company being consolidated. However, often the standardizing entries required from the group point of view are not known to the consolidation unit.

217

If the consolidation unit reports its data in local currency, then the standardizing entry is also made in local currency. The reported financial data and the standardizing entries are then translated into group currency during the currency translation process. In the Consolidation system, standardizing entries are stored in separate data records in addition to the reported financial data. This is to allow for independent analysis of the data at any time. Standardizing entries that simultaneously post amounts to balance sheet items and income statement items can cause an adjustment to net income, in which case the Consolidation system automatically calculates the adjustment amount. This can lead to an allocation of deferred income taxes.

standards data
IDoc Interface (BCSRVEDI)
Data structure of the different EDI standards, for example EDIFACT or ANSI X12.

standby database
Database Interface, Database Platforms (BCDB)
Identical copy of the production database on a standby database host. The secondary (that is, standby) database service can be used if the primary database fails, so providing a continued service with minimal data loss. The secondary database is usually located at a remote site (connected by a network) and is kept uptodate with the primary by the shipping of the transaction log records generated on the primary database. Examples are Oracle Standby Database and Informix HighAvailability Data Replication (HDR).

standby power
Contract Billing (ISUBI)
Electrical power that a utility company keeps on reserve for customers who produce their own energy. This power is used in case there is a temporary full or partial power outage caused by a malfunction, or if there is a shutdown due to an inspection.

standing instructions
Treasury Management (TRTM)
Information relating to the business partner that is used on a recurring basis (such as payment methods and correspondence) and transferred automatically to the financial transactions.

218

start
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Point in time for the start of processing of a work item. The processing of a work item starts when the work item first assumes the status reserved or the status in process.

start condition
(CRMBF)
condition that has to be fulfilled before a followup action is automatically started.

start offset
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Period of time after which a maintenance package becomes due for the first time. A start offset must be specified if a different period of time is valid the first time the maintenance package performed. For example, if the length of the cycle is two years, but the package is only to be performed for the first time after three years.

start profile
Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
Set of parameter names used to automate the startup or shutdown of an R/3 system on a networkwide basis. The start profile contains parameter settings that determine which application servers and associated processes (e.g. spool processes) are to be started when an R/3 system is started. The start profile is generated on the basis of a model profile supplied by SAP and the installer's specifications regarding the size of the host system.

start transaction
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Transaction whose execution allows all the import parameters of a workflow to be entered. After the start transaction has been executed, the SAP System starts the associated workflow with this data automatically.

startfinish relationship
219

Project System (PS)


Relationship where an activity must start before its successor can finish.

startfinish rule
Project System (PS)
Measuring technique for determining the percentage of completion in progress analysis. When the startfinish rule is used in progress analysis, the percentage of completion (POC) increases from 0% to the initial POC at the start date. When the finish date is reached, the POC is 100%. Values commonly used in the startfinish rule are: 0 100: The initial POC is 0 %. 20 80: The initial POC is 20% 50 50: The initial POC is 50 % You can use the startfinish rule if you want to make an initial rough estimate of how the project is progressing. You should only use it if you want to carry out analyses for the whole project structure.

startstart relationship
Project System (PS)
Relationship where an activity cannot start until its predecessor has started.

startup method
Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
A subclass of monitoring architecture methods, specifically those methods that should be automatically started when the server is started.

state
Personnel Development (PAPD)
Status of an item or development plan in individual development planning.

state license fee zone


IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)

220

One of the geographical elements within the geographical reference zone. It is used to establish tax or pricing conditions for a group of customers which have been entered in the system as coming from the same geographical area.

state of the art


Application Components (SAP)
The technology that is already known before the present invention, in respect of which the present invention is novel (involving an inventive step).

statement block
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Block of logically related statements in an ABAP program. Statement blocks are defined by control key words. Since they process parts of a task, they can be considered as substructures of a processing block.

statement chain
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Sequence of concatenated statements in an ABAP program. Example: WRITE: SPFLICITYFROM, SPFLICITYTO. or WRITE: SPFLICITYFROM, SPFLICITYTO.

statement sequence
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Sequence of separated statements in an ABAP program. Example: WRITE SPFLICITYFROM. WRITE SPFLICITYTO.

221

WRITE SPFLIAIRPTO.

statement structure
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Structure of an ABAP statement. When developing programs in the ABAP Editor, you can use the 'Insert statement' function to insert the basic structure of an ABAP statement in the program code.

statement wage type


Payroll (PY)
Identifies additions to a wage type. These wage types are shown in the payroll results with separate names.

static breakpoint
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Breakpoint set directly in the program code using the ABAP Editor. Static breakpoints are not userspecific. If a developer sets a static breakpoint, the program stops at this point for every developer. Static breakpoints are always visible in the program code.

static chart
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
DS planning board chart that cannot be randomly shown or hidden; it is permanently displayed.

static lotsizing procedure


Material Requirements Planning (PPMRP)
Procedure where the lot size is calculated using the entered quantities in the material's material master record. Costs incurred from storage, from setup procedures or from purchasing procedures are not taken into account. There are three different criterion according to which the lot size can be calculated: lotforlot order quantity (exact lot size) fixed lot size replenishment up to maximum stock level 222

station
Product Variant Structure (LOMDPVS)
Line segment on the lowest level. It cannot be further divided. A product remains at a station for the duration of one takt only. Every station is a line segment, but not every line segment is a station.

statistic
Quality Management (QM)
Actual value, denoting a special characteristic in a frequency distribution. Examples of statistics are: Mean value Standard deviation of the sample (internal dispersion)

statistical company
Consolidation (FILC)
A statistical company is one which is established to accept specific types of entries, for example, nongroup payables/receivables. It is used during the breakdown of a financial statement item by trading partners. In this case a partial breakdown can occur, whereby the value of the financial statement is split into parts that can be assigned to different trading partners and the remainder that is assigned to the statistical company. A statistical company should not be assigned to a subgroup.

statistical condition
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
Used with split invoicing in exchanges, where a condition is needed to calculate excise duty. The value of the condition (net price) is not posted because it is accounted for by another invoice.

statistical key figure


Controlling (CO)
Statistical values describing: Cost centers Orders 223

Business processes Profit centers There are two types of statistical key figures: Fixed value Total value Fixed values are carried forward from the current posting period to all subsequent periods. Totals values are posted in the current posting period only.

statistical key figure group


Controlling (CO)
An organizational unit that groups together statistical key figures that are to be processed in one step.

statistical line item


Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FICA)
Document item that is not relevant to the General Ledger and is kept in the contract accounts receivable and payable as a marker. This items do not change posting totals for reconciliation keys and thus do not effect the transaction figures in the General Ledger. Statistical line items can be processed by the payment program and the dunning program. Example: Downpayment request, budget billing request, statistical late payment fee

statistical order
Controlling (CO)
Statistical orders are not charged with costs in the normal sense. The costs posted to them are for information purposes only and cannot be settled. Every order in Controlling can be used as a statistical order.

statistical posting
Financial Accounting (FI)
The posting of a special G/L transaction where the offsetting entry is made automatically to a specified clearing account (received guarantees of payment for example). Statistical postings create statistical line items only.

statistical process control


224

Logistics General (LO)


The application of statistical techniques to control operations and processes.

statistical range of coverage


Material Requirements Planning (PPMRP)
Number of days the available plant stock covers requirements. This is assuming average daily requirements, and that no new receipts are taken into acount. On the one hand, the statistical range of coverage can be defined by the MRP controller as the planned number of days that a material must still be available, and on the other hand it can be calculated by the system.

statistical value
Foreign Trade (SDFT)
Net domestic value (fair market value) of a product when it crosses a border. (Fair market value is the price the product is normally sold at in the manufacturer's domestic market.) This value is needed for each exported or imported item for INTRASTAT declarations. It is used as a basis for keeping track of foreign trade statistics.

statistical value
Quality Management (QM)
Value of a statistic.

statistics content component


Advertising Management (ISMAM)
Content component that can be assigned to all levels of statistics content component hierarchies, can be assigned below the first level of a price content component hierarchy and cannot be assigned to structural content component hierarchies. Content components are grouped for statistical evaluations in statistics content component hierarchies. Statistics, structural and price content components are distinguished according to their use in the content component hierarchy.

statistics content component hierarchy


Advertising Management (ISMAM)
Structure that describes relationships between content components in terms of statistics. 225

Structures of publications or radio stations can for instance be reproduced in a statistics content component hierarchy. This allows you to perform statistical evaluations for ads and commercials. Statistics content component hierarchies should be created for sales of ads and Internet advertising. You do not need to create this type of hierarchy for sales of commercials, ad inserts and distributions.

status
IDoc Interface (BCSRVEDI)
Processing status of an IDoc (SAP standard format for electronic data exchange), for example "generated" or "ready for dispatch". An IDoc generally has several statuses, which are stored in its status record and provide information on its progress so far. The current status (and hence the current processing status) is additionally found in the IDoc control record.

status
SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Status of an archived document. An archived document can have the following statuses: unknown: not known prepared: cannot be accessed yet online: accessible offline: known but not accessible

status
Personnel Management (PA)
Statuses identify the current standing of an object or infotype record within the following HR components: Personnel Development (PAPD) Organizational Management (PAOS) Compensation Management (PACM) Training and Event Management (PE) There are five statuses: active planned submitted 226

approved rejected All objects and infotype records receive a status when they are created. Statuses also affect the type of activities creating, changing, deleting, etc. that you may perform. For example, you cannot change an infotype record whose status is submitted. Note: Do not confuse this status with an employee's status in Personnel Administration (PAPA Actions Infotype).

status attribute
Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
A monitoring attribute in which error message text and alert status can be reported. The status attribute describes the general status of an SAP component.

status attribute
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
Attribute assigned to a document by the system. Example: VW: Viewed RS: Reply sent

status bar
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Element of the graphical user interface. The system uses one of the output fields of the status bar to display messages issued by the primary window. Other fields in the status bar provide information on the system status. The status bar extends along the entire width of the lower edge of the primary window.

status characteristic
Advertising Management (ISMAM)
Indicator with attributes that describe an aspect of a processing status, for example whether the ad spec data for an ad item was entered completely and the schedule lines could be generated by the system.

227

status concept of physical documents


Document Management Services (R/3) (BCSRVKPRDMS)
Definition of the possible status of physical documents as well as Status transfers of physical documents in the SAP Knowledge Provider (KPro). The status conept is used, for example, to control versioning.

status confirmation
IDoc Interface (BCSRVEDI)
Report from an external system about the processing status of business data received from an R/3 System in IDoc format. In R/3, the status confirmation is appended to the IDoc in the form of status records.

status file
IDoc Interface (BCSRVEDI)
File which contains the status records which the EDI subsystem passes to the EDI interface for outbound messages.

status group
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Grouping of different statuses (such as delivery status, billing status, or pricing status) for the purpose of determining the status messages that appear in the incompletion log.

status information
Customizing (BCCUS)
Information required for monitoring project progress during R/3 implementation. Examples of status information include scheduling and resource data. You can analyze status information using Project analyses.

status information
Customizing Tools (Techniques) (BCCUSTOL)
Information required for monitoring project progress during R/3 implementation.

228

Examples of activity data include scheduling and resource data. You can analyze activity data using Project analyses.

status information
Customizing Tools (Techniques) (BCCUSTOL)
Information for monitoring the progress of an SAP System implementation project. The status information includes the management of deadlines and resources. You can analyze the status information in the project analysis.

status line
SAPscript (BCSRVSCR)
Line located at the bottom of the text entry area. The status line contains: the assigned style the current form the section of text displayed

status log
Document Management System (CADMS)
Record of the status history of a document info record. The log describes which users set a certain status and when. you can make an additional log entry if the document type allows it.

status management
CrossApplication Components (CA)
Facility that allows you to set the current processing status of an object. Statuses can be set by the system or by the user. The current status of an object (i.e. the combination of all statuses) determines which actions can be performed for which object.

status network
Document Management System (CADMS)
System whereby document statuses are linked together (DMS) by defining previous statuses which status can follow on from which. This enables you to control the workflow involved in processing a document info record 229

and to document changes in the status log. For example, a simple status network might look like this: Work request In work Checked against standard Released

status number
Controlling (CO)
Defines the order of the user statuses in a status profile. Statuses are usually set in ascending order according to their status number. An object (such as an order or project) can have more than one status active at any one time. However, only one of these statuses can have a status number. If you set a new status with a status number, it deactivates the previous status. This is only allowed in certain circumstances.

status object
CrossApplication Components (CA)
Object created by the system including the assignment of an object type (possibly a status profile) to a SAP object (such as an order, a resource or a project). The system must create a status object so that the SAP object can use status management. All the status information for a SAP object is stored under the object number of the corresponding status object in a separate status management table.

status of physical documents


Document Management Services (R/3) (BCSRVKPRDMS)
The systemrelevant processing status of a physical document in the SAP Knowledge Provider (KPro). These statuses are used within KPro for ensuring consistency. Only certain status transfers of physical documents are allowed between these statuses.

status profile
CrossApplication Components (CA)
Profile used to control user statuses.

230

A status profile is created by the user in general status management. In a status profile you can: Define the sequence in which user statuses can be activated Define initial statuses Allow or prohibit certain business transactions

status reason
Recruitment (PARC)
The reason why an applicant has a particular overall status. Example: An applicant is rejected and receives the status 'Rejected'. The following reasons can be given for the applicant's rejection: 01 Insufficient qualifications 02 Formal error 03 Overqualified 05 No requirement

status record
IDoc Interface (BCSRVEDI)
One of the three record types of an IDoc (SAP standard format for electronic exchange of application data). Each status record contains a status that corresponds to an IDoc processing step.

status selection profile


Project System (PS)
A selection profile is a combination of system and user statuses, used to select data in the project information system and to trigger predefined milestone functions.

status selection profile


CrossApplication Components (CA)
A status selection profile is a combination of system and user statuses used to select data. For example, you can use status selection profiles in information systems to choose objects according to their status.

231

Status transfer
Loans (TRLO)
Describes the processing steps a loan must progress through from when it is entered up to the transfer to Financial Accounting.

status transfer of physical documents


Document Management Services (R/3) (BCSRVKPRDMS)
Management of physical documents in SAP Knowledge Provider by status transfers and status of physical documents.

status type
Document Management System (CADMS)
Categorization of document statuses (DMS) according to distinguishing features. You can assign a status type to a status if you want the system to make additional checks. For example, you can define at which stage in the processing the status can be set. The following status types are defined: Initial status Primary status Locked status Original processing status Archive status Temporary status

status type
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Type of GUI status in the Menu Painter. When creating a GUI status, you can choose one of the following status types: Screen Dialog box List List in dialog box

232

status window
Inbound SelfBilling Procedure (ISASBI)
Window displaying according to status the selfbilling transmissions that are still to go through initial processing, that is, for which the processing indicator has not yet been set.

statusdependent project version


Project System (PS)
Project version dependent on the user and/or system status, and created by the system automatically if the status in an object, such as an activity, changes.

statutory consolidation
Consolidation (FILC)
The organizations being combined transfer their assets to a new organization created for this purpose.

steering committee
AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Decisionmaking body to which the project team reports. The steering committee comprises senior managers. It supervises the achievement the project targets in respect of work, costs and deadlines. It is a task of the steering committee to provide the conditions necessary for efficient completion of a project.

steganography
Application Components (SAP)
Methods of cryptography which seek to conceal the existence of a message. A text file could, for example, be hidden "inside" an image or a sound file. By looking at the image, or listening to the sound, you would not know that there is extra information present.

step
Personnel Development (PAPD)
A sequence of various items in a development plan. One step can contain several (alternative) items.

233

step
Knowledge Warehouse (KMKW)
Interaction between the author and the program to be recorded resulting in the screenshot being recorded, e.g. mouseclick on a pushbutton. The pupil must execute exactly this step when using the tutorial. The The system goes to the next step in the tutorial if nothing else has been defined. The iTutor Recorder generates an interaction area and a bubble text for each step.

step
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Elementary module of a workflow definition. The following types of step exist: Activity (= task reference) Condition, multiple condition Event creator, wait step Send mail Web activity Form step Container operation User decision Document generation Loop (UNTIL and WHILE) Fork Undefined step The individual steps are arranged and processed sequentially. Only steps in forks can be executed simultaneously. Steps within a workflow definition can only be changed or inserted according to certain rules, taking into account block orientation.

step acquisition
Consolidation (ECCS)
Increase in the direct investment on behalf of an upper unit in an investee unit through the purchase of stock from a consolidation unit outside the consolidation group. If the consolidation unit selling the stock belongs to the same consolidation group, this is referred to as a transfer.

step acquisition

234

Consolidation (FILC)
Acquisition by an investor of the stock of a company in addition to the stock already held by this investor. The stock is acquired from a third party (that is, a company outside the group). This transaction leads to an increase in the investment. If, however, the stock is acquired from another company within the group, this is known as a transfer.

step consolidation
Consolidation (FILC)
Consolidation procedure which consolidates the individual trading partners one level at a time, moving upwards in the hierarchy of a multilevel group. The companies lowest in the hierarchy are consolidated first. The resulting individual financial statements are then used for consolidation on the next hierarchical level.

step definition
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Part of a workflow definition. The step definition contains all the data relevant for a step. The scope depends on the step type defined.

step log
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
A log containing all the steps for which processing has started in a specific workflow. From the step log of a workflow, you can doubleclick to display a work item (and change it if you have the appropriate authorization). Any errors that may have occurred during a workflow are displayed in the step log and can be analyzed using the error messages shown.

step loop
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Sequence of repeated screen elements. A step loop defines a kind of table which contains the elements in a number of repeated lines or blocks. You can define a step loop as fixed or variable. 235

Step loops are similar to table controls, but have less functional scope. You can convert step loops to table controls.

step name
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Name for a step in the workflow definition.

StepbyStep Guide
(CRM)
Documentation created independently of the release cycle, and not delivered with the CRM System, but via SAPNet. Stepbystep guides are intended to help when implementing CRM components. A stepbystep guide: Refers to business scenarios Combines technical and business documentation in one docment Describes crosscomponent processes Contains screen shots Is a practical guide Is intended for reading on paper, and not on the screen The target group for stepbystep guides is internal and external consultants.

stepwise simultaneous consolidation


Consolidation (ECCS)
A consolidation procedure within consolidation of investments that simultaneously performs consolidation by consolidation group. When a consolidation group contains further consolidation groups, the groups at the lowest level are simultaneously consolidated. Then the next higher consolidation groups are simultaneously consolidated, taking into account the results of the lowerlevel groups. Hence, the resulting consolidated values are exactly the same as when a pure simultaneous consolidation is performed. However, the results are accurately disclosed for each consolidation unit and each level of the hierarchy. In contrast to pure simultaneous consolidation, this consolidation procedure provides the following additional reports for the consolidation groups: You can report on the consolidated total values. The conslidation entries can be distinguished between elimination entries that are valid for lower hierarchy levels, and elimination entries that represent the delta values in the given consolidation group.

stochastic blocking

236

Invoice Verification (MMIV)


Procedure for checking incoming invoices. In stochastic blocking, the system blocks invoices for payment on a random basis. The higher the invoice value, the higher the probability of it being stochastically blocked.

stock
Inventory Management (MMIM)
Materials Management term for part of a company's current assets. It refers to the quantities of raw materials, operating supplies, semifinished products, finished products, and trading goods or merchandise on hand in a company's storage facilities. Also known as "inventory".

stock allocation
Retail (ISR)
Procedure used at head office for planning, monitoring and controlling the allocation of materials to plants. Stock allocation is carried out using allocation tables.

stock category
Logistics Execution (LE)
Uniquely identifies a specific warehouse stock of a material, for example, quality inspection stock, returned stock, and so on.

stock determination
Inventory Management (MMIM)
Crossapplication function allowing you to determine the stock from which material is to be withdrawn in the course of stock removal, order picking, and staging operations. This function supports the batch determination process and stock removal strategies of the Warehouse Management component (LEWM).

stock determination group


Inventory Management (MMIM)

237

In conjunction with the stock determination rule, a unique key at plant level for a strategy in the stock determination process.

stock determination rule


Inventory Management (MMIM)
In conjunction with the stock determination group, a unique key at plant level for a strategy in the stock determination process.

stock determination strategy


Inventory Management (MMIM)
Combination of stock determination rule and stock determination group. With predefined settings, the stock determination strategy facilitates the automatic withdrawal of materials. It is uniquely specified at plant level. The stock determination strategy is linked directly to the material through assignment in the material master record. In contrast, the stock determination rule is defined in the calling application (e.g. Inventory Management or production orders). In this way it is possible to use different withdrawal strategies independently of the material and the calling application.

stock in quality inspection


Logistics General (LO)
That part of total valuated stock which is currently undergoing quality inspection. Stock in quality inspection is not part of "unrestricteduse" stock.

stock in transfer
Inventory Management (MMIM)
Quantity of a material which, in a physical stock transfer using the twostep procedure, has already been taken out of stock at the point of issue but has not yet arrived at the point of receipt. Stock in transfer is part of valuated stock at the point of receipt, but cannot yet be labeled "unrestricteduse". Stock in transfer comprises the quantity transferred through transfer postings within Inventory Management but does not include the quantity transferred on the basis of stock transport orders. The latter type of stock is termed "stock in transit".

stock in transit

238

Inventory Management (MMIM)


Quantity of a material that has already been withdrawn from storage at the issuing plant on the basis of a stock transport order, but has not yet arrived at the plant to which it is being transferred (receiving plant). Stock in transit is included in the valuated stock of the receiving plant, but does not count as "unrestricteduse" stock. Outside SAP, stock in transit may also be referred to as "intransit inventory".

stock indicator
Cable Solution (CAB)
An indicator that determines how cable material stock is managed.

stock item
Production Planning and Control (PP)
This item category is used to enter a material as a component in a bill of material if the material is kept in stock. Before you can enter a material as a stock item, a material master record must exist for the material. The material type of the material must support quantity update.

stock item
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Item category with which a material kept in stock is entered as a component of a BOM. To be able to enter a stock item, the material must have a material master record with a material type that allows quantities to be updated.

stock keeping unit


Basic Data (ISAFSBD)
A detailed schedule line of an AFS material. AFS materials can be mapped in various grid values (e.g. 38/yellow) and category values (e.g. quality A/country of origin D). As long as AFS materials are only mapped in grid values or only in categories, a grid value or the AFS material in a category form a valid stock keeping unit. If a master grid and a coverage strategy are assigned to an AFS material, the stock keeping units correspond to the possible combinations of grid and category values.

stock keeping unit item

239

Sales and Distribution (ISAFSSD)


The item of the billing document that came from a batch split item of the delivery and in turn from a schedule line of the sales document. While schedule lines or batch split items are subordinate to a (main) item in the sales document as well as in the delivery, the SKU items are equal to the main item in the billing document. You can thus control in Customizing if the billing in the billing document should occur at the level of the main item or SKU item. Example: A schedule line for the sales document item jeans is the grid value blacksize S. In the delivery this schedule line is assigned as batch split item to a main item jeans. In the billing document in the view Billing document items the main item of the delivery (jeans) is carried out. Blacksize S receives its own item in the form of the SKU item. This item is completely equal to the item jeans and can be distinguished from it by its own billing document item number.

stock list
Inventory Management (MMIM)
List showing the total quantity and value of the stock of one or more materials at plant and storage location levels. For materials managed in batches, the stock of each batch can also be displayed. In the case of consignment materials, the stock figure per vendor can be shown.

stock management level


Inventory Management (MMIM)
Total of all stock management units having the following characteristics in common: From the Inventory Management viewpoint: Plant, storage location, material type, and stock type From the Warehouse Management viewpoint: Warehouse number and storage type Stock management units are assigned to a samplebased physical inventory via stock management levels.

stock management unit


Inventory Management (MMIM)
Part of a stock of material that is not subject to further subdivision and for which a separate book inventory balance exists. Example: The stock of a material in quality inspection at a storage location represents a stock management unit.

240

stock material
Inventory Management (MMIM)
Material that is constantly kept in stock (for example, a raw material). A stock material has a material master record and is managed on a value basis in a material stock account.

stock of material provided to vendor


Inventory Management (MMIM)
Stock that is made available to the vendor (subcontractor) and stored on the vendor's premises but remains the property of your enterprise. It can only be used to carry out subcontracting work on the basis of subcontract orders.

stock overview
Logistics Basic Data (LOMD)
Overview of the stocks of a particular material across all organizational levels (for example, plant and storage location). The different display versions of a stock overview correspond to the different stock types and the order in which these appear.

stock placement strategy


Logistics Execution (LE)
Strategy whereby the system automatically searches for a suitable storage bin in the warehouse for placing goods into storage. As a rule, you define a certain stock placement strategy for each storage type (for example, search for the next empty bin) in order to optimize stockkeeping and the material flow within the warehouse.

stock planner
(ISRKUNDE)
A stock planner is responsible for procurement operations in a site. A site can be "divided up" among a number of stock planners responsible for the procurement of different articles. An assignment to a purchasing group is made in the user master of every stock planner. If a stock planner has ordering autonomy, the purchasing group is copied to the purchase order.

241

stock planner group


Retail (ISR)
Sites are assigned stock planner groups, which are responsible for requirements planning. The assignment of a stock planner group to a site is dependent on the article involved.

stock population
Inventory Management (MMIM)
Total of all stock management units covered by a samplebased physical inventory. The stock population is divided into the sampling area and the completecount area.

stock removal
Logistics Execution (LE)
The removal of goods from storage bins in the warehouse. Stock removal in the WM system refers not only to the picking of goods for deliveries or for production purposes, but also to the removal of materials from a storage bin (or storage type) in the warehouse for any reason. To facilitate the search for materials in the warehouse, it is possible to use stock removal (picking) strategies available in the WM system.

stock removal strategy


Logistics Execution (LE)
Strategy whereby the system automatically searches for a suitable quant within a particular storage type for a stock removal. As a rule, you define a particular stock removal strategy, such as FIFO or LIFO, for each storage type. These strategies are used to optimize stockkeeping and material flow within the warehouse.

stock selection stock symbol


Application Components (SAP)
A unique abbreviation assigned to a security by a stock exchange that is used for identifying the security on stock tickers, automated information retrieval systems, and elsewhere. 242

stock transfer
Logistics Execution (LE)
The physical movement of materials from one warehouse to another, from one storage bin to another within a warehouse, or from one plant/storage location to another plant/storage location.

stock transfer
Logistics General (LO)
The removal of materials from storage at one location and their transfer to and placement into storage at another. Stock transfers can occur either within a single plant or between two different plants. The removal of stock from storage at the first location and its placement into storage at the other can be posted in the system either in one step ("onestep procedure") or in two ("twostep procedure").

stock transfer horizon


Supply Network Planning (SNP) (APOSNP)
Within this horizon, SNP does not plan shipments.

stock transport order


Materials Management (MM)
Purchase order used as a mechanism to request or instruct a plant to transport material from one plant to another (that is, to effect a longerdistance physical stock transfer) within the same enterprise. The stock transport order allows delivery costs incurred as a result of the stock transfer to be debited to the material that was transported.

stock transport scheduling agreement


Materials Management (MM)
Scheduling agreement used as a mechanism to request or instruct a plant to transport material from one plant to another (that is, to effect a longerdistance physical stock transfer) within the same enterprise. The stock transport scheduling agreement allows delivery costs incurred as a result of the stock transfer to be debited to the material that was transported.

stock type
243

Inventory Management (MMIM)


Means of subdividing storage location stock or special stock. The stock type indicates the usability of a material. The storage location stock and special stocks on a company's own premises are subdivided into three different types: Unrestricteduse stock Stock in quality inspection Blocked stock Special stocks with the vendor or customer are subdivided into two different stock types: Unrestricteduse stock Stock in quality inspection If batch status management is active, a further stock type is supported: "restricteduse stock". The stock type has relevance in connection with the process of determining the available stock in Material Requirements Planning and to material withdrawals and the physical inventory process in Inventory Management.

stock value
Inventory Management (MMIM)
Value of the total quantity of a material held in stock under a certain material number and belonging to the company holding it. Example Stock value for: A plant A company code A valuation type A storage location

stock/requirements list
Material Requirements Planning (PPMRP)
Uptodate overview of a material's stock situation. The overview is generated usig a function which draws together all the current and relevant data (production orders, sales orders, and so on). Therefore, it always shows the most uptodate availability situation for a material as opposed to the MRP list which reflects the stock/ requirements situation at the time of the last planning run.

244

stockkeeping unit
Inventory Management (MMIM)
Unit of measure in which stocks of a material are managed. The system converts all quantities entered with a different unit of measure into the stockkeeping unit. The term "stockkeeping unit" is exclusively an SAP Inventory Management term and is synonymous with the term "base unit of measure" used in other applications.

stop scheduling agreement release


Enhancements to scheduling agreements MM (Outbound) (ISASCHEMM)
Scheduling agreement releases can be stopped either statically (i.e. per scheduling agreement item) or dynamically (i.e. on the basis of the criteria stored in the release creation profile). (See also "dynamic stop" and "static stop".)

stopoff
(APOVS)
Stop made during a shipment. This refers, not to a rest break, but to one of several destinations within a shipment. Example: A shipment is made to several customers. It starts at plant A and has customers B, C and D as its destinations. The sequence of the shipment is A > B > C > D, and there are two stopoffs: B and C.

stopover
Travel Management (FITV)
With regard to a business trip or offsite work, a destination other than the main destination

storage area
Logistics Execution (LE)
A logical or physical subdivision of the storage type. A number of bin locations can be combined in one storage area according to different criteria selected by the user. 245

For example: firecontainment area area reserved for heavy material

storage area for partial quantities


Logistics Execution (LE)
Storage type that has been specially created for the purpose of managing partial quantities.

storage bin
Logistics Execution (LE)
Smallest addressable unit of space in a warehouse (often referred to as a "slot"). Since the address of a storage bin is frequently derived from a coordinate system, the bin is referred to as a coordinate; for example, 020403 refers to row 02, stack 04, level 03.

storage buckets profile


CrossApplication Components (APOCA)
Defines the time buckets in which data based on a given planning area is saved in Demand Planning or Supply Network Planning. A storage buckets profile specifies: One or more periodicities in which data is saved. The horizon during which the profile is valid. A time stream ID for data that is saved in buckets finer than days. The time stream must be as long as or longer than the horizon. It must not be shorter than the horizon. The number of days for data that is saved in a fixed number of rolling days at the beginning of the planning horizon, and after that in a larger bucket. Weekly data that falls into two months is saved in separate storage buckets.

storage category
Document Management System (CADMS)
Logical view of physically stored data that is used as a secure area for original application files. Separating physical storage data into several logical views allows structured storage of different original application files. You can define the following secure areas: SAP Database (part of the standard SAP System) Vault (defined in Customizing of DMS) 246

Archive (SAP ArchiveLink 4.5 HTTP Content Server interface) Storage systems that are controlled using the SAP ArchiveLink 4.5 HTTP Content Server interfeace such as: HTTP Content Server RFC Archive Example: You would like to save original application files for different areas in a storage system. To do this you maintain the following storage categories for the storage systems: A1 for general information A2 for training course materials A3 for test instructions

storage class
Logistics Execution (LE)
Used to classify hazardous materials with regard to storage requirements. Hazardous materials with similar characteristics are often grouped together under the same storage class, for example, flammable liquids or radioactive materials.

storage costs
Material Requirements Planning (PPMRP)
Costs incurred from the storage of a material. They are recorded in the material master record as a percentage of the valuation price, and are referred to by optimizing lotsizing procedures during the lotsize calculation.

storage costs indicator


Material Requirements Planning (PPMRP)
Indicator that specifies the percentage rate for storage costs, which is used for the procurement quantity calculation.

storage data

247

Document Management System (CADMS)


Data carrier where the original application file for a document info record is stored. The document info record also contains the path in the file system for finding the original. Examples: Text file Application: Microsoft Word Data carrier: p09324 (PC with Windows NT operating system) Path in file system: d:\text01.doc Graphics file Application: PowerPoint Data carrier: Archive_01 (archive defined using SAP ArchiveLink) Path in file system: no path (the system finds the archive file ID automatically)

storage location
Print and Output Management (BCCCMPRN)
Parameter that specifies where the SAP spool system should store data. Spool data can be stored either in the database or in the file system.

storage location
Logistics Execution (LE)
An organizational unit that allows the differentiation of material stocks within a plant. The storage location is hierarchically situated between the plant and the warehouse number.

storage location
Logistics General (LO)
An organizational unit facilitating differentiation between the various stocks of a material within a plant.

248

storage location MRP


Material Requirements Planning (PPMRP)
In storage location MRP, the planning run is carried out at storage location level. The storage location stock is not contained in the available stock at plant level. Instead, it is planned separately. The following possibilities are available: The storage location is excluded from the planning run. If the storage location is excluded from the materials planning, then the storage location stock is neither included in the available stock nor is materials planning carried out for it. The storage location stock is available for stock withdrawal without limitations. The storage location is planned separately. If you have defined a reorder point and a replenishment level for storage location MRP, the system can monitor the storage location stock automatically. When the stock level falls below the reorder point, the system creates a procurement proposal for the replenishment quantity. The net requirements calculation is, however, limited to the storage location.

storage location selection list


Inventory Management (MMIM)
List of the storage locations at which a material is stored. In the case of a goods issue, for example, the storage location selection list can be used as a basis for deciding from which storage locations a certain material should be withdrawn.

storage location stock


Inventory Management (MMIM)
Periodspecific quantity of a material at a storage location, differentiated according to stock type.

storage object
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
Any object in the system for which storagerelevant data is stored, and which is linked to another object in the system, for example, a customer tank. For example, a delivery scheduler needs to know the maximum capacity of oil tanks at both a plant and a customer business partner location.

249

storage object access mode


IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
The way in which the system connects a storage object to its characteristic segment. The access mode of a storage object characteristic segment indicates the type of storage object to which it belongs.

storage object characteristic


IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
Any variable or descriptive text which describes an object which can be used to store materials (for example customer tanks). Some storage object characteristics are entered and maintained in applicationspecific objects such as plants and storage locations. Other storage object characteristics can be entered and maintained using the storage object characteristic maintenance tool.

storage object class


IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
The technical classification of the storage object characteristic segment. The storage object class defines which subsegments of a storage object are active. For example, a storage object characteristic segment may contain fields which exclusively describe bulk material storage characteristics or packaged goods storage characteristics.

storage object history


IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
Data which records a change of state of a storage object. For example, routine measurements of the contents of a storage object could be recorded in a storage object history.

storage object segment


IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
A collection of characteristics which are generally applicable to inventory holding objects.

250

The storage object characteristic segment can be attached to various inventory holding objects in the system and allows processes to use the same mechanisms to determine key information about the storage object.

storage object history


IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
Data which records a change of state of a storage object. For example, routine measurements of the contents of a storage object could be recorded in a storage object history.

storage object segment


IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
A collection of characteristics which are generally applicable to inventory holding objects. The storage object characteristic segment can be attached to various inventory holding objects in the system and allows processes to use the same mechanisms to determine key information about the storage object.

storage object sequence number


IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
The number of a subordinate storage object in terms of the owning object. For example a #shipto# customer may have three storage objects with the numbers 001, 066 and X74.

storage object type


IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
The technique used to support the definition of common reference data for storage object characteristic segment instances.

storage path
SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Path in which the SAP System places documents that are to be stored in a file repository.

storage resource

251

Production Planning for Process Industries (PPPI)


Storage or production unit that combines the functions of storage facilities (for example, inventory management) with those of resources (for example, capacity requirements planning). Storage resources link a storage location to a resource and can be used for intermediate storage of materials during production. Their capacities are not only timebased, but also quantitybased. A distinction is made between the following types of storage resources: Storage resources that are only used for storing materials These storage resources are available for storage continuously over time. During planning, they are only considered with regard to their stocks. Storage resources at which production processes also take place During planning, these storage resources are considered both with regard to their stock level, as well as their timebased commitment.

storage resource
Master Data (APOMD)
One of the resource categories. This resource category is not linked to any planning functionality. It is a purely descriptive characteristic that can be used, for example, to select resources for resource maintenance. Additional resource categories are production resource, transportation resource and handling unit.

storage section
Logistics Execution (LE)
Logical or physical subdivision of a storage type. . You can group several storage bins with the same characteristics into one storage section. The criteria for this grouping can include, for example, section for heavy materials, section for bulky materials, and so on.

storage section
Logistics Execution (LE)
A logical or physical subdivision of the storage type. A number of storage bins can be grouped together into one storage section according to different criteria selected by the user. 252

Examples: firecontainment section, section reserved for heavy materials.

storage system
SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Physical storage medium, in which documents can be stored. Examples of physical storage media: Database File server External archive

storage system
Archiving (CAARC)
External storage system that is connected to the SAP System and used to store archive files that have been created using SAP Data Archiving. A storage system can include various storage media, although it usually is based on optical storage media such as CRROMs, WORMS, and so on.

storage type
Logistics Execution (LE)
A physical or logical subdivision of a complex warehouse (= warehouse number), distinguished by the warehouse procedures used or its organization form or function. Examples goods receipt area goods issue area picking area high rack storage area posting change area

storage type search


Logistics Execution (LE)
Search strategy used by the system to determine into which storage type a material should be placed or from which storage type a material should be removed.

storage unit
253

Logistics Execution (LE)


A logical grouping of one or several amounts of material which can be managed within a warehouse as a unit that belongs together. Each storage unit has a number which identifies it, the storage unit number (SU number).

storage unit document


Logistics Execution (LE)
Document that provides information about a storage unit. Currently, there are 4 kinds of storage unit documents: Transfer order document Displays information about a single item for the movement of a material in a storage unit. Storage unit contents document Provides a list of the contents and quantities of all the materials in a storage unit. Storage unit (SU) document Displays several sections with the same SU number in numerical and bar code formats. This document can be used to support your administrative processes. For example, when you need to note the SU number for a storage unit, you can tear off a small section of the SU document for scanning or other administrative purposes. Storage unit / Transfer order document The SU/TO document displays information about the movement of an entire storage unit.

Storage Unit Management


Logistics Execution (LE)
Storage unit (SU) management in the WM component makes it possible to optimize warehouse capacity and control material flow utilizing storage units (logical groupings of materials) within the warehouse. All storage units, whether the materials are stored on standard pallets, wire baskets or other containers, are assigned an identifier a number which is maintained in the system as the storage unit number. Therefore, it is possible at any given time to know where each storage unit is located in the warehousing complex, the amount of material contained in it, and which operations have been processed or planned for it.

storage unit number


Logistics Execution (LE)
Number that clearly identifies a storage unit within a client. 254

storage unit type


Logistics Execution (LE)
Classification of storage units. Storage units that are handled in the same manner and have the same physical features are classified by a storage unit type. Example: All storage unit types that consist of a standard wooden European pallet as a loading device and materials with a maximum stack height of 80 cm (including the height of the wooden pallet) can be grouped together under the storage unit type "S80". Other examples are: E1 = standard European pallet I1 = standard industrial pallet WB = wire basket TK = tank

store
SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Transfer of a document to an external storage system. This can be an external archive, for example. There are two types of storing: Synchronous storing Asynchronous storing SAP ArchiveLink provides the following storage scenarios: Storing for subsequent entry Storing for subsequent assignment Store and enter Store and assign Assign and store

store
Archive Development Kit (BCCCMADK)
After data is archived, you can move the data from the archive files to an external storage system using the Content Management Service (CMS). Files can be created in any directory and are not restricted to the basic path of the storage system.

255

store
Retail (ISR)
Type of plant in which goods are presented and sold to consumers.

store and assign


SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Storage strategy that contains the following processing steps: The incoming document is stored in an external storage system. A workflow is then started with the aim of assigning the document to an object or business object in the SAP system. The workflow is processed immediately and therefore also the assignment of the stored document to the business object. The only difference between the strategy "store and assign" and "storing for subsequent assignment" is that the workflow is started immediately. In this way the user who stores the incoming document also assigns it immediately to the current object or business object.

store and enter


SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Storage strategy that involves the following processing steps: The incoming document is stored in an external storage system. This starts a workflow, which is used to enter the business object in the SAP System. A link to the stored document can then be seen in the SAP System. The workflow is processed (or in other words, the object is entered) immediately. "Storing and entering" is therefore analogous to the storage strategy "storing for subsequent entry", except that the workflow starts immediately, meaning that the agent who stores the incoming document, also enters the business object directly after storing.

store autonomy
Retail (ISR)
Power of store to make own decisions in certain areas.

store characteristic

256

Retail (ISR)
Data on the characteristics of a store.

store communication
Retail (ISR)
Store communication stands for the controlled exchange of business messages between a storebased retailing system and a central system, whereby data remains consistent between the two systems. In SAP Retail, this is achieved either via remote access to the central system or via ALE technology (Application Link Enabling).

store confirmation request


Retail (ISR)
Request issued to store for the confirmation of certain data (such as sales volume, stock levels or requirements) for analysis purposes.

store delivery
Retail (ISR)
Special type of delivery in which the goods recipient is a store.

store department
Retail (ISR)
One of the ways of representing the internal structure of a plant from a retailing viewpoint. Departments are often defined as cost centers. Departments play an important role in internal logistics in stores.

store master
Retail (ISR)
Store master records in their entirety.

store master record

257

Retail (ISR)
Master record for a store.

store order
Retail (ISR)
Request for goods triggered by store. A store order can be converted into the following followon documents: Purchase requisition Purchase order (to an internal or external vendor) Sales order Delivery A store order can be created in one of two ways: Online One of the above documents is created in the R/3 system by a store or by headquarters at the request of a store (by telephone, for example). Offline The store sends its requirements or ordering information by ALE to headquarters where the above documents are automatically created. If this cannot be done automatically (due to data incompleteness, for example), the store order has to be manually processed in headquarters.

store retailing
Retail (ISR)
The functions in a distributed retailing system that are specific to the store in which they are used.

store retailing system


Retail (ISR)
Computeraided retailing or POS system used locally in the stores of a retail company.

store return
Retail (ISR)
Return of goods from store to distribution center. 258

store trading
Retail (ISR)
A retail format involving a store in a fixed location.

storing for subsequent assignment


SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Storage strategy that contains the following processing steps: The incoming document is stored in an external storage system. A workflow is then started with the aim of assigning the document to an object or business object in the SAP System. The workflow is processed at a later time, and therefore the assignment of the document to a business object or an object in the SAP System also takes place later.

storing for subsequent entry


SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Storage strategy that involves the following processing steps: The incoming document is stored in an external storage system. This starts a workflow, which is used to enter a business object in the R/3 System. A link to the stored document can then be seen in the R/3 System. The workflow is processed (or in other words, the object is entered) at a later stage.

storing in dialog
SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Storing a document in an external storage system. Storing in dialog means that the document to be stored is displayed, and the storing is requested in an R/3 application. The request is carried out immediately and the result is returned to the R/3 application. Incoming documents are stored in the dialog.

straight
Graphic (BCFESGRA)
The Portable Interactive Graphics (PIG) project for displaying graphics in MiniApps uses a color palette. There are different color schemes to determine which colors are selected from the palette in which order. You can use the "multicolored straight" scheme for all charts except curve / line charts. 259

This scheme is not to be confused with the "multicolored straight reverse" scheme.

straight reverse
Graphic (BCFESGRA)
The Portable Interactive Graphics (PIG) project for displaying graphics in MiniApps uses a color palette. There are different color schemes to determine which colors are selected from the palette in which order. You should only use the "multicolored straight reverse" scheme with curve / line charts. This scheme is not to be confused with the "multicolored straight" scheme.

stranding
Cable Solution (CAB)
The process of twisting several wires together to make a cable.

strategic forecasting
Demand Planning (APOFCS)
Type of forecasting that focuses on producing regional or national sales projections at the Brand aggregate level. These forecasts assist management in developing longrange capacity planning and business planning strategies. Management is subsequently provided with a detailed business analysis (such as price sensitivity, media responsiveness and event analysis) of the business drivers that influence sales demand. Strategic forecasting is longrange (one month to five years) and business planningoriented.

strategic posting
Consolidation (ECCS)
A plan to determine which consolidation unit is to be posted with respect to each consolidation task, when differences, adjustments to net income and the like, occur. For example, you can determine that any occurring elimination differences always be posted to the consolidation unit that reported the payable.

strategy
Corporate Performance Monitor (SEMCPM)
Element of a scorecard, which describes the procedure in a specific subarea suitable for reaching the topmost goals of an enterprise.

260

strategy plan
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Maintenance plan that you can use to represent complex maintenance cycles, with the help of maintenance strategies. For simple maintenance cycles, you use the single cycle plan, to which no maintenance strategy, just a maintenance cycle is assigned. Example: A maintenance task is to be performed on a reference object every 100 operating hours or every 500 compression cycles.

strategy type
Batches (LOBM)
A strategy type contains default values which are taken over when a strategy record is created. The following information can be stored: a sort rule the maximum number of batch splits the information whether the number of batch splits can be changed during batch determination the unit of measure in which the batches are to be displayed for selection (in unit of entry or in stockkeeping unit) the information whether batch determination is to be carried out in dialog mode a quantity proposal Furthermore, you can store a selection class. If you do so, however, you cannot enter a different selection class when creating a stra tegy record.

stratification
Inventory Management (MMIM)
Process during inventory sampling. In the stratification process, the sampling area is divided into individual strata, each with relatively small value dispersion. The random selection and extrapolation are carried out separately for each stratum.

street route
Meter Reading (ISUDMMR)
Sequence for reading the registers in a meter reading unit.

261

street section
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
Division of a street. This becomes necessary if all allocations do not apply to all addresses on one street, for example, if there are different zip codes for one street. The street section is defined by the house number range.

stress test
AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Testing the complete R/3 environment with all components involved (transactions, ABAP, Basis, etc.) in certain scenarios until the system performs to predefined values. This includes pushing the system to peak capacity. Stress testing involves the cooperation of end users, application and Basis components, with the goal of making the system fast an reliable.

strict versioning
Document Management Services (R/3) (BCSRVKPRDMS)
Function in SAP Knowledge Provider (KPro) that ensures the content of a component of a physical document cannot be overwritten. Each change to the component content of a physical document requires that a new physical document is created with all the components.

structural content component


Advertising Management (ISMAM)
Content component that can be assigned to all levels of a structural content component hierarchy and can be assigned below the first hierarchy level in price and statistics content component hierarchies. Content components are grouped in structural content component hierarchies to describe the content structure. Structural, price and statistics content components are distinguished according to their use in the content component hierarchy.

structural content component hierarchy

262

Advertising Management (ISMAM)


Structure that descibes relationships between content components from a structural perspective. Structures of publications or websites can be reproduced in a structural content component hierarchy. This allows you to sell and position ads, banners and buttons. Structural content component hierarchies should be created for the sale of ads and Internet advertising. You do not need to create this type of hierarchy for the sale of commercials, ad inserts and distributions.

structural enhancement
Customizing (BCCUS)
Enhancement of a hierarchy structure with new nodes, documents and hypertext books

structural graphics
Organizational Plan (PAOS)
A tool for displaying and editing within Organizational Management. Using structural graphics, you can display the structure of your organizational plan and move or edit individual objects within your structure.

structural report
HR Information Systems (PAIS)
Structural reports are used to report on business data displayed in a tree structure. This could be an enterprise's organizational structure, for example, or its training program. Structural reports enable you, for example, to restrict reporting to all of the objects assigned to one specific branch of the tree structure.

structural sales
Commissions (ISISCS)
Sales unit which is hierarchically structured and usually legally independent. Employee remuneration and career paths within structural sales are performanceoriented and the emphasis is placed on sales success and the procurement of new staff.

structure
Archive Development Kit (BCCCMADK)

263

This is the name of the structure, if you are working with a logical database and the structure in the "Segment" field is a pseudonym for a real structure.

structure
SAP Knowledge Warehouse (BCDOCIWB)
Type of info object in the SAP Knowledge Warehouse. A structure contains a hierarchy of links to documents with content information (content objects) and possibly to other structures. Structures are used as a table of contents and as a navigation instrument when displaying.

structure
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Structured data type in ABAP. A structure is a group of internal fields that logically belong together. In ABAP, you address an entire structure by its name. To address the individual fields within a structure, you specify the name of the structure followed by the relevant field name.

structure
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
ABAP Dictionary object type. A structure is a complex type and consists of components that can have any type (data element, structure, table type or reference type). Structures are used in ABAP programs or to define the type of the interface parameters of function modules.

structure depth
HR Information Systems (PAIS)
A parameter that you can set with other parameters when requesting reports. The term "structure depth" refers to the hierarchical structures used in Personnel Planning. The various elements of a hierarchical structure are arranged on successive levels. When particular reporting types are requested, you can determine the number of levels in the structure that are included in the report. To do so, you enter the structure depth. The system uses the root organizational unit that you specified earlier as its starting point, and then processes the number of levels you entered.

264

structure graphic
Graphic (BCFESGRA)
A type of graphic comprising network graphics and hierarchy graphics.

structure hierarchy
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Function in the ABAP Editor that compresses the source code of a program so that only the essential statements are displayed.

structure include
SAP Knowledge Warehouse (BCDOCIWB)
Substructure that is linked into another structure. This substructure can only be displayed within another structure.

structure indicator
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Key for the edit mask. You can use the structure indicator to: determine the generic structure of the location number make the hierarchy levels within the location structure visible in the location number

structure instance
AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Occurrence of an organizational unit.

structure link
SAP Knowledge Warehouse (BCDOCIWB)
Structure referenced from another structure. A structure that was inserted as a link is displayed as a node without subnodes in the Web Browser. 265

If you click on the node, the structure is displayed in a new structure window with all its subnodes.

Structure Modeler
AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
An ASAP accelerator with which you can graphically display the organizational structure of your enterprise using R/3 organizational units. You can only use the R/3 Structure Modeler if you are a registered Visio user.

structure modeling
AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Using the R/3 Structure Modeler, it is possible to portray structure scenarios of your enterprise, across several applications, taking account of strategic business processes, information flows, distribution scenarios, and R/3 business objects. The Structure Modeler uses a colored tile to show each instance of an organizational unit. By studying the advantages and disadvantages of the various alternatives, you can better select the scenario most suited to your implementation.

structure node
Executive Information System (ECEIS)
A node in a master data hierarchy that contains further dependent or subordinate nodes.

structure nodes
Customizing Tools (Techniques) (BCCUSTOL)
Part of an IMG structure which can contain other structure nodes or IMG activities.

structure overview
Project System (PS)
List in the information system; it displays all the selected object types, such as WBS elements and activities, in their hierarchical structure. You can access individual overviews and detail screens from the structure overview.

structure planning

266

Project System (PS)


The planning of an actual project structure the project itself, associated networks, network activities, and activity elements, along with the relationships between them.

structure proxy
Graphic (BCFESGRA)
The structure proxy deals with structure graphics such as networks.

structure relationship
Document Management Services (R/3) (BCSRVKPRDMS)
Instance of a special relationship class predefined by the SAP Knowledge Provider (KPro). The structure relationship is of relationship type "hyperlink" and is used to administer the Where_used list for hyperlinks that form structures.

structure scenario
AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
In structure modeling, the portrayal of business units such as legal entities, enterprise areas, or the locations of a company, using organizational units in the R/3 System (for example, company code, enterprise area, plant). You can display a company's structure by linking and assigning these organizational units. You may use business area scenarios, company code scenarios, or profit center scenarios, depending on the way you protray your business units.

structure title
Customizing (BCCUS)
Heading in the hierarchy structure (table of contents) of an Implementation Guide. The structure title corresponds to the short text (document title).

structure view
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
View type in the ABAP Dictionary. Structure views were used to generate structures from the fields of several tables.

267

From Release 3.0, the creation of structure views is no longer supported.

structured article
Retail (ISR)
Group of articles (such as a set, prepack, or display) that is handled in certain logistics processes as a separate article. You assign the components to the structured article when maintaining the bill of material (BOM). The structured article itself is the BOM header, its components the BOM items. Structured articles can be resolved into their components, for example, upon goods receipt.

structured data type


ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
ABAP data type. Structured data types can either be predefined or userdefined.

Structured Entity Relationship Model


AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Modeling method used to create data models in the Data Modeler.

structured field symbol


ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Field symbol that points to an internal or external structure. Structured field symbols can be any structure, or a structure defined in the ABAP Dictionary. When specifying the structure, you must define an initial field to which the field symbol points.

structured material
Retail (ISR)
Group of materials (such as a set, prepack, or display) that is handled in certain logistics processes as a separate material. You assign the components to the structured material when maintaining the bill of material (BOM). The structured material itself is the BOM header, its components the BOM items. Structured materials can be resolved into their components, for example, upon goods receipt.

268

structured query language


Database Interface, Database Platforms (BCDB)
Query language developed by IBM to facilitate access to relational databases. SQL has two types of statements: DDL (data definition language) statements DML (data manipulation language) statements

Structured Query Language


ABAP Workbench (BCDWB)
Query language developed by IBM to facilitate access to relational databases. SQL has two types of statements: DDL (Data Definition Language) statements DML (Data Manipulation Language) statements

structured type
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Type consisting of elementary types.

student number
Campus Management (ISCM)
Personal identification number that the university assigns to each registered student.

style
SAPscript (BCSRVSCR)
Type of style sheet. Styles consists of paragraph and character formats which can be used to format documents. Styles are subordinate to forms. If a form contains attributes that are ignored in the style, the attributes of the form are used.

269

subannual consolidation
Consolidation (FILC)
Consolidation which does not include all the periods in a year and takes place at least twice a year. Users can define the frequency of consolidation and the periods to be included. Examples: Monthly consolidation Quarterly consolidation Semiannual consolidation

subapplication
CATT Computer Aided Test Tool (BCCAT)
Part of an application, according to the price list.

subappraisal
Personnel Development (PAPD)
An individual appraiser's appraisal for a multisource appraisal. The overall appraisal is generated from the various subappraisals.

subassembly
Production Planning and Control (PP)
An assembly that is also a component in another assembly.

subassignment
Consolidation (ECCS)
A characteristic that can further differentiate ("break down") the values of characteristic financial statement item. SAP delivers the following predefined subassignments: subitem category and subitem partner unit year of acquisition period of acquisition transaction currency unit of measure 270

The value assignments to the characteristic subitem is free, which means that you can use the characteristic in any way you prefer for example, for the assignment of transaction types or regions. The breakdown category of a financial statement item determines how the subitem is used. In addition to the predefined subassignments, the customer can define custom subassignments, which extend the consolidation database. Examples for this might be the fields Country, Product Group, and so forth.

subcategory
HR Manager's Desktop (PAMA)
Within a theme category, a subcategory groups together subcategories and/or executable functions with related content. A subcategory is therefore a way of subdividing the function tree in the left screen area, and does not trigger a system activity itself.

subclaim
Claims Management (ISISCM)
A subclaim is opened when a new claimant has to be assigned to a claim.

subcontract order
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
Instruction to a supplier (subcontractor) to manufacture an ordered part using the products specified in the relevant "products to be provided" items. A subcontract order contains a maximum of one order item (for the ordered product or the ordered service/work) and one or more "product to be provided" items (for products that the orderer makes available to the subcontractor free of charge for processing purposes).

subcontract order
Materials Management (MM)
Instruction to a supplier (subcontractor) to manufacture an ordered part using specified "materials to be provided" (freeissue materials). A subcontract order contains a maximum of one order item (for the ordered material or the ordered service/work) and one or more "material to be provided" items (for materials that the orderer makes available to the subcontractor free of charge for processing purposes).

subcontracting

271

Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)


A process during which a product (ordered product) is manufactured by a vendor (subcontractor) who, however, requires certain components (products to be provided) in order to manufacture the product; These components are to be provided by the ordering party or by a third party. The vendor (subcontractor) sends the ordered product back to the ordering party, who then uses the ordered product as a component for the finished product.

subcontracting
Materials Management (MM)
In the SAP System, the processing, by an external supplier, of materials provided by a customer. The result of this processing is the manufacture by the supplier (subcontractor) of an ordered material or product, or the performance by the supplier of an ordered service.

Subcontracting
Subcontracting (ISADSUC)
Maintenance of a part by a vendor (in this case, a subcontractor), therefore, a form of outsourcing. The service provider provides the part to be maintained to the subcontractor along with other components that may have to be exchanged during the subcontract rework. After maintaining the part, the subcontractor returns it to the service provider.

subcontracting challan
Inventory Management (MMIM)
In India, a document that you use to track components sent to subcontractors, primarily for excise purposes. Under normal circumstances, you are liable for excise duty on any excisable materials that leave your premises. However, an exception is made for materials that you send to subcontractors, provided that they process the materials and return them to you in the form of the end product. The subcontracting challan serves as a record of all the excisable materials that you have issued. When the subcontractor returns the end product, you reconcile it against the challan. If any of the materials cannot be accounted for, you are liable for excise duty on them.

subcontracting component
Inventory Management (MMIM)
Material made available by a customer to a subcontractor to enable the latter to execute an order placed with him by the customer. Also known as "freeissue" material (UK).

272

subcontractor
CrossApplication Components (APOCA)
Vendor, who manufactures an ordered product for an ordering party, for which required components are to be provided by the ordering party or a third party. Once production is completed, the subcontractor sends the ordered product back to the ordering party, who then uses the ordered product as a component for the finished product.

subcontractor
Materials Management (MM)
In the SAP R/3 System, an external supplier who performs certain work or manufactures a certain material or product for a customer using materials provided by the latter for this purpose.

subcontractor
Customer Bill of Services (ISECBOS)
The construction proprietor does not task the subcontractor to perform construction work. The contractor is a different company (for example, main contractor), and a contractual relationship exists between the contractor and the subcontractor. The SC is liable to the contractor (not the construction proprietor) for observing obligations of service and guarantee.

Subcontractor
Subcontracting (ISADSUC)
Vendor who performs preventive maintenance/maintenance tasks for a service provider. The subcontractor receives the parts to be maintained from the service provider and delivers the maintained parts back.

subcriterion
Purchasing (MMPUR)
In the vendor evaluation system, a component of a main criterion. For example, the subcriteria "price level" and "price history" together constitute the main criterion "price". That is to say, the score for the main criterion "price" is derived from the scores for these two subcriteria. Users can specify subcriteria and apply different weights to them.

subenvironment
273

Controlling (CO)
Group of functions which are assigned to an environment and located at a lower level than the main environment. Subenvironments group functions by theme. They are provided in the standard system. A subenvironment can be assigned to different environments. When you assign a function to a subenvironment, it is automatically made available in all main environments containing that subenvironment. When you define a template, however, only the environment can be specified, and not the subenvironment.

subfeature
Personnel Management (PA)
Subfeatures are used by main features (= features). They return values by querying various personnel and data structure fields of an enterprise. A subfeature can be used in various main features. If several features have identical parts, they can be stored in a subfeature and then included in a main feature.

subfeature operation
Personnel Management (PA)
The operation FLDID is used to call a subfeature. Processing then continues in the subfeature.

subfunction
Business Navigator (BCCUSTOLNAV)
Function in the eventcontroled process chain (EPC) of a process. Subfunctions are not assigned directly to business application components.

subgroup
Consolidation (FILC)
A consolidated entity is called a subgroup if its consolidation units represent companies.

subgroupconsolidating entry
Consolidation (FILC)
A subgroupconsolidating entry is one which is made to eliminate a parent's investment against the equity of an investee.

274

The journal entries that accomplish the consolidation are typically: consolidation of investments reclassifications on a group level

subitem
Manufacturer Part Number (ISADMPN)
Item created by the System if a part has been exchanged. The subitems refer to a main item; the main item becomes a statistical noted item.

subitem
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Subdivision of a BOM item. The difference between one subitem and the others is the installation point. A subitem has no control functions in the bill of material. It can be used to help create companyspecific automatic assembly programs.

subitem
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FICA)
Subitems arise when a line item is partially cleared. There are two types of subitems: cleared and open.

subitem
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Item in a sales document that refers to a higherlevel item. Services and rebates in kind can be entered as subitems belonging to main items.

subitem
Consolidation (ECCS)
A subassignment of a financial statement item. Other optional subassignments are partner unit, transaction currency, and year of acquisition. Subitems might be used to further classify FS items with transaction types, product groups, division and so on. Fixed assets might require the assignment of transaction types in order to portray the item's development from the beginning balance to the ending balance.

275

Subitems can be classified using subitem categories.

subitem category
Consolidation (ECCS)
The subitem category allows you to classify your subitems, which are needed for the additional assignment of financial statement items. A subitem category is assigned to each FS item, thus allocating all of the associated subitems of the category to the FS item. For example, you can define subitem categories for: Transaction types Product groups Divisions

subitem categorylike characteristic


Consolidation (ECCS)
A characteristic that shares the same properties as the characteristic "subitem category", these properties being: The characteristic is independent, but belongs to a compound with a dependent characteristic. The characteristic has a fixed value in the breakdown category.

subject
IQ Campus (PQ)
A branch of knowledge or study arranged and formulated for teaching.

subject
(CRMBTX)
Description of a problem, cause or solution action in coded form. This coding consists of a catalog type, code group and code. They can be assigned hierarchically to display relationships such as problem and cause in the coding.

subject profile
(CRMBTX)
Grouping of code group profiles from different catalogs. The subject profile is used to limit the selection of subjects in transaction processing. The limitation can be structured, thereby enabling the creation of a hierarchy. The subject profile is assigned to the transaction type.

276

subject profile category


Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
Controls attributes of the subject profile, for example, how many catalog categories are allowed, which ones, and whether one or more codes can be selected using the application help.

subledger accounting
Financial Accounting (FI)
Accounting at the subsidiary ledger level, such as Customer Vendor Asset Subledgers give more details on the postings made to the reconciliation accounts in the general ledger.

sublocation
Basic Data (PPBD)
A sublocation is a subdivision of a location. It implies the logical or physical separation of stock. Sublocations of a plant or a disposition area are: storage locations

submitted
Personnel Management (PA)
Submitted refers to one of the statuses you can assign to objects and infotype records in Personnel Management. See also: Status (PA)

subnetwork
Project System (PS)
Network which replaces a network activity and only covers a portion of the project. It is linked to other subnetworks in the same project. Subnetworks are generally used in large projects. 277

subobject
Customizing (BCCUS)
Part of a view cluster. The navigation window contains the subobjects in their various dependencies. The complex business object is displayed as the superior object, and its subobjects are dependent objects.

subobject
Customizing Tools (Techniques) (BCCUSTOL)
Subobject of a Customizing object. Subobjects were managed in the Customizing object directory until Release 4.5B. They linked Customizing objects to documents in the IMG structure. IMG activity management changes have made the creation of subobjects unnecessary except inexceptional circumstances.

suboperation
Production Planning and Control (PP)
A suboperation is subordinate to an operation. Suboperations are used, for example, to allocate persons and machines to an operation for which several persons or machines are needed at the same time. A suboperation can be costed, but it cannot be scheduled. There are, for example, the following types of suboperations: suboperations of operations in routings suboperations of operations in maintenance task lists

suborder
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Order which is inferior to a superior order within an order hierarchy.

subordinate packing instruction


Handling Unit Management (LOHU)
Used to create multilevel handling units. They contain materials and packaging materials, and can contain further subordinate packing instructions.

278

subordinate relationship
Returnable Packaging Logistics (ISARL)
A subordinate relationship can be entered in addition to a main relationship. Subordinate relationships also consist of combinations of location and exchange partner. For example, you can use a subordinate relationship to show that each business partner can be either customer or vendor. This is the case, for example, if the OEM delivers the empty packaging and receives the full, while the vendor receives the empty packaging and delivers the full. One of the two scenarios can be represented in the main relationship and one in the subordinate. You can also use subordinate relationships to map collective accounts, that is, accounts with several exchange partners.

subpopulation
Quality Management (QM)
A clearly defined part of a population.

subproduct
IndustrySpecific Component Oil (ISOIL)
Product actually delivered to the customers. (This differs from the base product, which is relevant for the valuation)

subproject
Project System (PS)
Internal organizational unit in the Project System, used to divide a work breakdown structure (WBS) into different responsibility areas. Subprojects thus form the organizational basis for decentralized project management. You can divide a WBS into areas, assigning separate budget responsibility to each area. These areas consist of WBS elements which are linked in the hierarchy, so forming a subtree within the overall WBS. This is called a subproject and is separately identified. Each subproject has an identifier. No two subprojects with the same project definition may have the same identifier, however, you can use the same subproject identifier in different project definitions. The subproject identifier is stored in the WBS element. It is passed on if you later subdivide the WBS element further.

279

subrogee
Claims Management (ISISCM)
One who acquires by subrogation rights belonging to another. A person who assumes the rights or claims of another (the subrogor) against a third party. An insurer who takes its insured's right to recover from a third party.

subroutine
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Program module that can be called by any program. You use subroutines to avoid having to write frequently used program components more than once. Data can be passed explicitly from and to subroutines. There are two types of subroutine: Internal subroutines External subroutines

subschema
Payroll (PY)
A subschema is a personnel calculation schema that is called up in another schema using the COPY function. A subschema does not have to be executable.

subscreen
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Part of another screen. To create a subscreen, you define an area of appropriate size in the main screen and place a call to the subscreen in the flow logic. A screen can have several subscreens in different areas. Calls can also be dynamic, so you do not have to specify which subscreen is to be used until runtime. A subscreen can be called by several main screens, but a subscreen cannot call other subscreens.

subscreen area

280

Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)


Area defined in the Screen Painter, into which a subscreen is placed at runtime.

subscreen container
Logistics Basic Data (LOMD)
Screen on which a fixed number of subscreens is displayed in the material master.

subscreen screen
Tools: Editors, Painters, Modelers (BCDWBTOO)
Screen with the screen attribute 'Subscreen'. A subscreen screen is embedded in a subscreen area on a main screen at runtime.

subscribe
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
To register yourself for a business object (for example, a purchase order, contract or another document) so that you are informed of changes to the object.

subscribe
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
The Business Workplace To append a shared folder to folders subscribed to. This reduces the time spent trying to access folders that are used frequently from shared folders, which is very big and has a complicated stucture.

subscriber
Media Sales and Distribution (ISMSD)
Customer with a valid subscription.

subscription

281

Media Sales and Distribution (ISMSD)


Purchase agreement for the regular purchase of a periodical publication. Depending on whether or not all the issues published are purchased, a distinction is made between: Full subscriptions (for all issues) and Partial subscriptions (e.g. Saturday subscriptions) The price of a subscription is normally lower than the total of the cover prices of the issues.

subscription
(CRMMW)
The assignment of a site to a publication, specifying criteria values if necessary. The creation of subscriptions triggers the actual distribution of data to the sites.

subscription list
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
Open shared distribution list. A subscription list is an open shared distribution list in which users can enter and delete their own names.

subsequent account posting type


Returnable Packaging Logistics (ISARL)
If a subesquent account posting type is assigned to an account posting type, then for each item with this account posting type, the system automatically generates an additional item with the subsequent account posting type.

subsequent allocation
Cost Center Accounting (COOMCCA)
Valuation of internal activities at actual activity prices. This allows determination of the actual cost of the activities produced. All functions of actual costing are available (such as final costing).

subsequent calculation of value


Inventory Management (MMIM)
Procedure for the deferred valuation of goods movements, in which only the stock quantities of the relevant materials are initially updated at the time the movement is posted. The values involved are not recorded at this 282

time, the associated accounting documents not being generated until a later step.

subsequent consolidation
Consolidation (ECCS)
This consolidation of investments activity can occur for the first time in the period of first consolidation for any consolidation unit. It is not affected by any changes in investments of immediate investors. When applying the purchase method or proportional consolidation, the activity adjusts minority interests to account for changes in investee equity. When applying the equity method, the activity adjusts the immediate investors' equity in earnings of affiliates in accordance with the changes of the proportional equity of the unit being consolidated. Business practice can deviate from the above and can refer to all of the consolidation activities that succeed first consolidation as "subsequent consolidations".

subsequent consolidation
Consolidation (FILC)
This consolidation of investments activity can occur for the first time in the period of first consolidation for any internal trading partner. It is not affected by any changes in investments of immediate investors. When applying the purchase method or proportional consolidation, the activity includes the amortization of goodwill and eliminated hidden reserves (fair value adjustments), and the adjustment of minority interests to account for changes in investee equity. When applying the equity method, the activity primarily updates the immediate investors' equity in earnings of affiliates, as with the changes of the proportional equity of the company consolidated using the equity method. An exception to the above definition is that it is also customary to refer to all consolidations that follow the first consolidation as subsequent consolidations.

subsequent credit
Invoice Verification (MMIV)
Further reduction in amounts debited in respect of already posted business transactions. Example: You have already received a credit memo covering all the delivered goods. Now previously charged freight costs are additionally to be credited. The quantity to which the original credit memo relates is to remain unchanged.

subsequent debit

283

Invoice Verification (MMIV)


The debiting of further costs to one or more business transactions that have already been posted. Example: You have already received an invoice from your vendor covering all the delivered goods. Now freight costs are additionally to be charged. The invoiced quantity is to remain unchanged.

subsequent debit subsequent delivery free of charge


Sales and Distribution (SD)
A sales document, used in complaints processing, for delivering goods to a customer free of charge. You can create a free of charge delivery if, for example, a customer receives fewer goods than ordered, or if some of the goods were damaged in transit. The system then generates a delivery, based on the free of charge delivery.

subsequent posting
Switzerland (PYCH)
A posting resulting from and dependent on calculation/processing.

subsequent random selection


Inventory Management (MMIM)
Automatic generation of a new random selection for specific strata. Due to "stratum changers" (stock management units that are transferred from one stratum to another) or large differences during a samplebased physical inventory, a random selection already made may no longer be representative. Therefore, additional elements must be randomly selected for counting.

subsequent settlement
Purchasing (MMPUR)
Calculation of and accounting for the amounts due in accordance with conditions agreed between a customer and a vendor at the end of an agreed period. This process can be carried out on a onceonly or periodic basis.

subsequent shipping
284

Environment, Health Safety (EHS)


Cyclical generation of the worklist for report shipping orders to be shipped subsequently. Subsequent shipping takes place if: A previous version of the report has already been sent The corresponding report shipping order is recorded in the shipping history and is flagged as relevant for subsequent shipping.

subsequent sickness
Personnel Time Management (PT)
A sickness caused by a sickness or injury that occurred in the past (such as when an employee breaks his or her leg in March and the site of the injury becomes infected in June). The term is also used to refer to the reoccurrence of the same sickness. Example: An employee is written off sick in June and September because of a kidney infection. It is important to determine whether the second sickness is in actual fact a subsequent sickness or a different sickness altogether, as this has a profound effect on the calculation of an employee's entitlement to continued pay. If a subsequent sickness occurs, the days of absence as of the first sickness are counted up within a 6 month period. As a rule, continued pay is no longer effected after 42 days. The days of absence are not set back to zero until the 6 month period has elapsed. It is possible, for example, for an employee to be written off sick twice within a 6 month period, once for 30 days because of the first sickness, and then for 20 days because of the subsequent sickness. The employee would not be entitled to continued pay for 8 days.

subsequent test
ABAP Workbench (BCDWB)
Procedure that checks the functionality of the transported objects for a particular change request in the target system environment.

subsequent transport
Change Transport System (BCCTS)
Request used to repeat the transport of an object due to an error.

285

subset
IDoc Interface (BCSRVEDI)
Subset of an EDI standard.

subsidiary
Consolidation (FILC)
When company A, a parent company, has a controlling influence over company B, then company B is known as the subsidiary of company A. This controlling influence is normally due to the investor (company A) having an investment greater than 50% in the subsidiary (company B).

subsidiary ledger
Financial Accounting (FI)
Ledger which has the purpose of representing business transactions with customers and vendors. Subledgers in assets accounting are ledgers which represent the development of asset values.

subsidizer with customer account


Real Estate Management (RE)
Role category in a leaseout: It describes the business partner who pays a portion of the rent payable by the tenant with customer account. This role category is defined in financial accounting as customer; rental payments incurred by the subsidizer are posted to this customer account.

subsidy
Asset Accounting (FIAA)
Support measure for given investments provided by government authorities (for example, investment subsidy). Subsidies can be updated in all depreciation areas by reducing the base amount for depreciation. However, particularly when several support measures are claimed for one asset, it is useful to set up a separate depreciation area for each subsidy. This is recommended since the amounts claimed have to be separately displayed for each measure.

286

subsidy class
Real Estate Management (RE)
Grouping of fixtures and fittings characteristics belonging to a rental unit. This grouping leads to an increase in rent within the framework of an adjustment with a representative list of rents.

substance
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
A chemical element, compound, or mixture of the two.

substance contained in a substance listing


Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Substance listed in a substance listing.

substance in legal terms


Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Chemical element and its compounds in natural form or manufactured using production processes. These include additives that ensure product stability, and impurities produced during manufacture, but do not include solvents that can be separated from the substance without reducing its stability or changing its composition.

substance list
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
A directory containing substances that display certain properties. The list is generally compiled with a view to certain regulatory requirements. Examples: EINECS European Inventory of Existing Chemical Substances TSCA Toxic Substances Control Act MAKList (TRGS 900) German list detailing maximum work center concentrations and biological tolerance limits. 287

substance listing
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Listing of substances according to certain criteria, for example, a list of all substances that must be monitored in the workplace while using a product, according to the German regulations for handling hazardous substances (TRGS 900).

substance rating
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Assignment of a substance to one or more hazard characteristics according to the hazardous substance directive and selection of the relevant risk (R) phrases.

substance type
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Grouping of substances on the basis of certain criteria. Substance types can be, for example: Real substance Listed substance Real substance group Listed substance group Copy template

substitute
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
Substitute for a SAPoffice user. A substitute can have different authorizations (for example, access authorization to the inbox, outbox, private or shared folders) and/or be defined as functional. If the substitute is activated, he or she can log on to the mailbox of the SAPoffice user.

substitute
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
Representative for an SAPoffice user. You can assign various authorizations to a substitute. These include access authorization to inbox, outbox, private or shared folders). 288

When the substitute has been activated, he/she can log on to the SAPoffice user's mailbox.

substitute profile
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Collection of a substitute's "rights". A substitute profile is assigned to a substitute when the substitution is set up. A substitute profile combines a number of task classes. Task classes are assigned to singlestep tasks during definition. Substitute profiles are defined and task classes combined to form substitute profiles in Customizing.

substitution
Special Purpose Ledger (FISL)
Process of replacing values as they are being entered into the SAP R/3 System. Entered values are checked against a userdefined Boolean statement (prerequisite). If the statement is true, the system replaces the specified values. Substitution occurs before data is written to the database.

substitution
Personnel Time Management (PT)
A substitution is employee working time that deviates from planned working time and/or is paid at a different rate because the employee works at an alternative position. Substitutions allow shortterm deviations to personal work schedules, as well as different payment for an employee, to be recorded in the system. Substitutions can be set up regardless of whether the absent person is actually being replaced or substituted for temporarily.

substitution activity
Special Purpose Ledger (FISL)
Transfers substituted data to receiver dimensions during the rollup process. A substitution activity could be used, for example, to substitute a product group for individual products. When the rollup is executed, the individual products are summarized under the product group. Substitution activities must be assigned to the relevant field movements in the rollup definition.

289

substitution exit
Special Purpose Ledger (FISL)
Used in a substitution to refer to a userdefined ABAP program that is used to substitute specific values. Substitution exits define more complex substitutions and can substitute more than one value in a substitution. The prerequisite statement in a substitution must be true before the substitution exit is used.

substitution set
Upgrade General (BCUPG)
Database tables from the Repository that are substituted in a Repository Switch upgrade. They comprise almost the entire Repository.

substitution table
Upgrade General (BCUPG)
Table replaced in the database with a new version during a repository switch upgrade. The substitution tables include most of the R/3 Repository.

substitution type
Personnel Time Management (PT)
Grouping of employee scheduled shift times according to payment relevant elements.

substring
Network Interface, SAProuter (BCCSTNI)
Information needed by the SAProuter to establish a route connection. . A substring contains the host name, port name and password, if one was passed. Substring syntax: /H/ is the host name /S/ is the service (ports); optional, default value 3299 /W/ is the password for connecting the predecessor to the successor on the route und is also optional (default is "", no password) 290

substructure
SAP Knowledge Warehouse (BCDOCIWB)
Structure that was inserted in a structure as a structure include and is only used as a structure include. The substructure cannot be displayed separately. It can only be displayed within the structure in which it was included.

substructure
ABAP Dictionary (BCDWBDIC)
Logically related part of a table structure described in the ABAP Dictionary as a separate object and included in a table structure with an INCLUDE statement. A substructure is frequently used in more than one table.

subthreshold earnings
Commissions (ISISCS)
The difference between the amount fixed in the guarantee agreement and the lower amount the agent actually earns in the agreement period. This shortfall is offset where possible against excess earnings, so that the latter need not be paid out.

subtransaction
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FICA)
Key classifying the line item for account determination and/or for the way applicationspecific programs are processed. Main transactions are broken down into subtransactions. The function performed by the main transaction and subtransactions are defined in the relevant application area (for example utilities) and not in contract accounts receivable/payable.

subtype
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Copy of an object type, which has inherited all attributes, events and methods. The subtype can be modified and extended. Subtypes are used to edit or extend object types supplied by SAP.

291

subtype
Personnel Management (PA)
Subtypes are separate categories of information within a specific infotype. Infotype 1009 'Health Examinations', for example, enables you to save and maintain the following subtypes: Health exclusions Health examinations Some infotypes do not need to be subdivided into subtypes. When you create an infotype with subtypes, you must specify the subtype in which you want to store particular information.

subworkflow
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Workflow referenced in an activity in a workflow definition. At runtime, the workflow specified in the activity is executed when the step is executed.

Succession Planning
Personnel Development (PAPD)
The determination of potential successors and their further training requirements for vacant positions, or for positions that will become vacant in the future.

subworkflow
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Workflow referenced in an activity in a workflow definition. At runtime, the workflow specified in the activity is executed when the step is executed.

Succession Planning
Personnel Development (PAPD)
The determination of potential successors and their further training requirements for vacant positions, or for positions that will become vacant in the future.

succession planning simulation


292

Personnel Development (PAPD)


A function available in Succession Planning to help analyze and evaluate the knockon effects of a succession plan. By simulating succession planning, you can highlight the problems that can arise when people are transferred and their posts become vacant.

successor
Graphic (BCFESGRA)
The node that follows the node in question. It is important to distinguish between the following: Structural successor: The child of the node in question Successor in data container: The object that directly follows the object in question in the data container.

successor
Project System (PS)
The activity immediately following another activity.

successor
IDoc Interface (BCSRVEDI)
IDoc type generated from an existing IDoc type by adding data records. For each SAP release, there can be only one successor.

suffix
Sales and Distribution (SD)
A supplementary number assigned to a payment card when more than one card exists for the same cardholder account.

suggested retail price


Retail (ISR)
Sales price recommended by the manufacturer but not mandatory. Examples

293

The resale price is recommended by the manufacturer in a price list. The resale price is printed on the merchandise as a suggestion.

suitability percentage
Personnel Development (PAPD)
A measurement of the extent to which a person's qualifications profile matches a particular requirements profile. Suitability percentages should be seen as a criterion for sorting lists and should only ever be interpreted in conjunction with another person's suitability percentage (that is, as a means of comparison).

suitability range
Personnel Development (PAPD)
Used to subdivide ranking lists on the basis of suitability percentages.

Sum
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Standard function in R/3. You use this function to calculate totals for items, amounts and similar objects.

summarization
Controlling (CO)
Method summarizing the data of account assignment objects so that costs can be analyzed at a higher level.

summarization area
Profit Center Accounting (ECPCA)
The profit center standard hierarchy contains the following structure elements: the hierarchy area and the summarization area. The summarization area has the function of summarizing profit center data.

summarization dates
Product Cost Controlling (COPC)
Periods taken into account in order summarization or project summarization. 294

Period values that fall within these summarization dates and that were calculated in a previous summarization run are reset on the summarization object and recalculated. Period values that fall outside the summarization dates and that were calculated in a previous summarization run remain on the summarization object if the processing option "No reset" was selected.

summarization hierarchy
Controlling (CO)
Structure that creates alternative hierarchies for any project. It uses summarization keys constructed in the same way as project hierarchies.

summarization item
Funds Management (FIFM)
Component of a commitment item hierarchy. To create a commitment item hierarchy, bring together account assignment items at different, userdefined summarization levels. A summarization item can have account assignment items or other summarization items as its successors. Summarization items are budgeted in Funds Management. They cannot, however, be posted to in other components (Financial Accounting, Materials Management).

summarization item
Human Resource Funds and Position Management (PAPM)
A budget structure element that can be used for budgeting purposes, but whose budget cannot be allocated.

summarization level
Profitability Analysis (COPA)
A summarization level is a tool for improving performance. Summarization levels store an original dataset in summarized form. This allows functions that do not need detailed information quick access to presummarized data, and means that the data does not need to be summarized separately each time.

summarization object

295

Product Cost Controlling (COPC)


Object containing data calculated during one of the following summarizations: Order summarization Project summarization Summarization of a cost object hierarchy Example: A summarization object can contain the costs incurred for all orders of a particular order type and cost center.

summarization order
Controlling (CO)
Tool that enables multilevel summarization of orders, using freely definable criteria. The system creates a physical summarization order on each node of the summarization hierarchy created in this way.

summarized BOM
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Analysis of a BOM showing a complete list of all the explosion levels of assemblies and other components contained in a product. Assemblies or other parts which are used more than once are added together to form a grand total. The system multiplies this with the required quantity and displays it as one item. Displaying the assemblies as components is optional. You can choose whether to display assemblies as components (subassemblies).

summarized financial statements


Consolidation (FILC)
This is the sum of all the individual financial statements (corporate valuation) that have been through currency translation.

summarized JIT call


KANBAN (PPKAB)
JIT call for any material quantity that is procured anonymously for production. 296

Contrary to the sequenced JIT call, the summarized JIT call is not linked to a specific order (vehicle). Contrary to the JIT delivery schedule, which contains several schedule lines with a quantity and a deadline for a material, the summarized JIT call transmits only one quantity with a deadline. A new summarized JIT call does not replace an old JIT call, which has already been transmitted, but is added to the previously transmitted JIT calls.

summarized knode
Profit Center Accounting (ECPCA)
A node in a hierarchy which has other nodes assigned to it. For example, the Profit Center Accounting standard hierarchy contains summarized nodes which group together nodes of profit center data.

summarized range call


JustInTime Processing (ISAJIT)
JIT call for which a range of summarized JIT calls is entered. This range is then split into x individul calls. The delivery date is the same for each individual call.

summarized requirements
Sales and Distribution (SD)
Material requirements in a plant that have been summarized over a specified period and transferred as a total to MRP. The system creates a line in the requirements/stock overview for each total of summarized requirements. This could be, for example, the total requirements for one day or one week. The system summarizes according to the following criteria: plant date transaction requirement type and planning type

summary confirmation
Project System (PS)
In the summary confirmation, all the activity elements belonging to an activity are confirmed simultaneously.

297

summary data
Financial Accounting (FI)
Summarized form of posted amounts or quantities used for analysis purposes.

sumoftheyearsdigits method of depreciation


Asset Accounting (FIAA)
Calculation of depreciation which decreases by the same amount each year. The asset is depreciated using a mathematical series based on the remaining useful life. Since this mathematical series is valid only during the useful life of the asset, it is not possible to depreciate past the end of the useful life using this method.

superable earnings
New Zealand (PYNZ)
Amount on which the percentage contributions of the employer and employee to a superannuation fund are based. It usually contains the following: Salary Monthly Fortnightly Weekly Hourly wage Annual leave Sick leave Paid leave Car allowance Untaxed car allowance Bonus offcycle Night bonus

superannuation fund
New Zealand (PYNZ)
Investment vehicle to which employer and employee contribute for the employee's retirement. The contributions are calculated on the basis of the employee's superable earnings.

298

superclass
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Class from which a subclass is derived through inheritance.

superior equipment
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Technical object comprising several pieces of equipment. The structure of a complex technical object can be represented by assigning equipment to superior pieces of equipment. A piece of equipment that is assigned to a superior one can itself be a superior piece of equipment for another piece of equipment, resulting in a hierarchical structure.

superior order
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Order that is superior to one or more suborders within an order hierarchy.

superline
Payroll (PY)
Line in a remuneration statement. The values of several wage types are printed in this line.

superregion
European Monetary Union: Euro (CAEUR)
An optional definition that several countries can be assigned to.

supersession
Supersession Chains (ISASUS)
Application in ISAutomotive, with which material substitutions at the manufacturer are possible in all logistical functions in the system. Changes to the design, form and function of materials lead to a constantprocess of replacement, particularly in the aftermarket environment. Obsolete parts are replaced by new versions of the same part. This process is mapped as a chain in the SAP System (supersession chain). If,for example, part A must be replaced by part B, this replacement createsa relationship between part A and part B. This function is particularly useful for the distribution centers of large manufacturers, but can also be of use to manufacturers themselves and traders with respect to spares procurement. 299

supersession chain
Supersession Chains (ISASUS)
Chain of materials that can replace each other. For example, part A is substituted by part B due to changes in design, form, function or manufacturing process. There are two possible replacement types: oneway and fully interchangeable. For the first type, parts can only be substituted oneway, for example, part A can only be substited by part B. Part B can be substitued by part C and vice versa; that means that parts B and C are fully interchangeable.

supersession planning horizon


Supersession Chains (ISASUS)
Indicates a planning period defined for a supersession in the Material Requirements Planning. It covers the period from today, the planning date, to the time of the interchange, that means, to the date when the followup part in the supersession chain becomes valid. The standard MRP run is used within the supersession planning horizon. Outside of this planning horizon, a modified MRP run is used. This modified run deletes nonfirmed, planned receipts and does not create any new, planned receipts. The system still takes into account the planning horizon for MRP, which you can set in Customizing, even if the supersession planning horizon stretches further into the future.

supertype
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Object type from which another object type (subtype) has inherited all object type components. Changes to the object type components of the supertype only affect the object type components of the subtype if the components have not been changed for the subtype.

supplement
Media Sales and Distribution (ISMSD)
A newspaper insert designed similarly to a magazine, which is produced in mass circulation and which can be purchased by individual publishers. The main content of a supplement is the television and radio program.

supplement
Funds Management (FIFM)
Budget form, in which the original budget is topped up with additional funds.

300

supplemental demand
Contract Billing (ISUBI)
Electric power that a utility company supplies to customers who produce their own energy. This covers the customer's power need that surpasses inplant generation.

supplementary account assignment


Financial Accounting (FI)
Extra entries in an automatically generated line item, made by the user when entering a document.

supplementary logistics service


Retail (ISR)
Materialrelated service that supports logistics (e.g. prepacking). A supplementary logistics service (SLS) is assigned to other materials as an additional. SLS functions can be used both by customers and vendors. If a particular customer and vendor both uses an SAP system, the SLS functions can be used as follows: From the point of view of the customer The customer can order prepacked goods in a collective purchase order for a number of recipients. In the collective purchase order, the items ordered are assigned subitems. These subitems contain details on the recipients and the quantities involved. Prepacked shipping units can usually be crossdocked at a customer. If difference occur at goods receipt, the quantity in each subitem can be adjusted. From the point of view of the vendor: A vendor can receive collective purchase orders with SLS subitems by EDI. A sales order with the associated subitems is then created in the vendor's system. The subitems from the sales order are adopted in the deliveries. The subitems are not relevant for picking, but can be packed individually. Both customers and vendors can take the costs of SLS into account in pricing and update SLS data in the Retail Information System (RIS).

supplementation
Financial Accounting (FI)
Manual supplementation of automatically created document line items during document entry.

supplementation language
301

Change Transport System (BCCTS)


Secondary language used to supplement a language in an SAP system that is not completely translated.

supplementation logic
Change Transport System (BCCTS)
Defines the conditions under which languages in an SAP system, which areonly partly translated, may be supplemented by another language.

supply area
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
Area in the shop floor where material is provided which can be directly used for production. The supply area is used in KANBAN production control and for material staging using Warehouse Management (WM), for example.

supply chain
Logistics General (LO)
Chain of operations and centers through which supplies move from the source of supply to the final customer or point of use. The supply chain starts with the extraction of raw materials (or origination of raw concepts for services) and each link in the chain processes the material or the concept in some way or supports this processing. The supply chain thus extends from the raw material extraction or raw concept origination through many processes to the ultimate sale to the consumer of the final product, whether goods or services.

Supply Chain Cockpit


Supply Chain Cockpit (SCC) (APOSCC)
One of the planning applications of the Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO). SCC is a graphical instrument panel for modeling, navigating and controlling the supply chain. It acts as a top planning layer through which the user can oversee other planning areas within an enterprise including demand, manufacturing, distribution and transportation. SCC has three components: Supply Chain Cockpit provides a detailed, graphical overview of complete chain. Supply Chain Engineer is used for modeling and maintaining the network model. Alert Monitor handles common exceptions and problems for all APO applications.

302

Supply Chain Engineer


Supply Chain Cockpit (SCC) (APOSCC)
A component of the Supply Chain Cockpit (SCC) used for creating extended supply chain models and performing graphical maintenance on them.

Supply Chain Execution


Advanced Planner and Optimizer APO (APO)
Encompasses the areas materials management(MM), production planning(PP),Warehouse Management, order management, scheduling and transport. Supply chain execution is an integral part of Supply Chain Management.

Supply Chain Management Alert


CrossApplication Components (APOCA)
Displays an exception situation or a problem in one of the applications of the Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO). There are two types of APO alerts: status alerts that require an action step or confirmation by the user message alerts that contain information

supply chain model


Advanced Planner and Optimizer APO (APO)
Basis for all APO planning functions. The overall supply chain model covers all areas of the chain from the supplier's supplier to the customer's customer, and is determined by importing the relevant data objects from source systems into APO. It is modeled in the Supply Chain Engineer, a component of the Supply Chain Cockpit. The supply chain model contains master data (such as: locations, products, resources production process models) and data relevant to transportation lanes.

Supply Chain Operational Reference model


Supply Chain Cockpit (SCC) (APOSCC)
A reference process model developed by the Supply Chain Council (SCC) that has become the crossindustry standard for supply chain management. The SCOR model depicts the basic supply chain, ranging from the supplier's supplier to the customer's customer, as a series of linked Source > Make > Deliver execution processes managed by a series of planning processes. The SCOR model describes: standard management processes relationships between standard processes 303

standard metrics for measuring process performance management practices that produce bestinclass performance

Supply Chain Planning


Advanced Planner and Optimizer APO (APO)
Encompasses planning activities such as Demand Planning, Distribution Planning, Deployment, Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling. Supply Chain Planning is an integral part of Supply Chain Management.

supply function
(CRMMT)
A function written to relate business anchors, if there is no business business relation between the business objects associated to these anchors. This function links the two business objects and retrieves required data at run time.

supply horizon
Supply Network Planning (SNP) (APOSNP)
This horizon determines how the system calculates the total supply in three different time horizons (shortterm, midterm, and longterm) by assigning supply categories to key figures for the three different time periods. For example, you can specify the categories that contribute to the distribution receipts key figure for midterm planning.

Supply horizon
Production Planning and Control (PP)
Indicates the number of days for which the system considers the ATD quantity and any additional quantity produced. Any quantity produced beyond the supply (push) horizon is not considered in DRP when the system calculates deployment during the deployment run. The user specifies the number of days in the supply horizon in MRP 4 of the material master record.

Supply Network Planning

304

Supply Network Planning (SNP) (APOSNP)


A module in the Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO) that enables organizations to determine sourcing, production plans, distribution plans, and purchasing plans. The system draws on the data universally available in liveCache to optimize such plans based on optimization algorithms and heuristic approaches that enable the planner to define rules and inventory policies. As an integral part of the overall supply network planning solution, APO's Deployment solution enables planners to dynamically rebalance and optimize the distribution network at execution time. The Deployment function in SNP determines optimized inbound and outbound distribution of available supply in response to shortterm demand, including customer orders, stock transport requirements, and safety stock requirements. Deployment logic considers a wide variety of shortterm constraints, including transportation, warehouse handling capacity and calendars. The primary purpose of the Transport Load Builder (TLB) is to use the single product transport recommendations calculated by Deployment to create multiproduct loads while ensuring vehicles are filled to maximum capacity.

supply permit processing


Work Management (ISUWM)
Process by which a utility company waits for the relevant authorities to provide the necessary approvals before reconnecting the customer. This ensures that certain safety measures (for an area prone to flooding, for example) are adhered to.

supply relationship
Quality Management (QM)
Business link with vendor or customer. Quality Management information for these business links are managed in the R/3 System using the following master data: Supply relationships in procurement: Vendor master record Info record with reference to vendor, material and plant Supply relationships in Sales & Distribution: Customer master record Info record with reference to a customer, sales organization and material.

supply segment
Production Supply (ISAS2L)
Level, on which the requirement/stock situation is determined for production supply.

305

The supply segment is determined by the combination of material, plant/location and production supply area. In production supply planning, all receipt and issue elements of a supply segment are included within a given planning horizon.

supply to line
Production Supply (ISAS2L)
Total number of activities for planning, triggering and executing supplyof components to the production line. There is a difference between automatic and manual production supply. The local focus is in the production supply area. The temporal focus lies in consumptionbased production supply in the space of a few hoursfrom the current time. In planningbased production supply, it is restricted to the period of time which is consolidated for the production plan.

supplying distribution channel


Retail (ISR)
Distribution channel via which a material is procured.

supplying division
Retail (ISR)
Division via which a material is procured.

supplying sales organization


Retail (ISR)
Sales organization via which a material is procured.

support
(CRMMKT)
A key figure attached to a product association rule which describes the frequency with which two or more products are sold together. For example, given a rule: P1....Pn > Pcs, support describes the probability with which products P1....Pn occur in the quantity of data (for example sales documents) under consideration. For example, if products P1....Pn appear in 40 out of 100 sales documents, then support would equal 40%. Support can be used to help determine how meaningful (and therefore useful) a product association rule is.

306

Support Package
Online Correction Support (Support Packages) (BCUPGOCS)
Set of corrections for errors in the R/3 Repository and in ABAP Dictionary objects. These corrections are collected periodically in Support Packages and made available in the SAP Service Marketplace.

Support Package Collection


Application Components (SAP)
Collection of several Support Packages provided for GA releases, for example R/3 Support Package Collection or R/3 HR Support Package Collection. Support Package Collections are shipped on CDROM.

Support Package level


Online Correction Support (Support Packages) (BCUPGOCS)
Specifies the version of an SAP system with regard to the Support Packages that have previously been imported.

Support Package Manager


Online Correction Support (Support Packages) (BCUPGOCS)
Tool for importing Support Packages into SAP Systems.

Support Package Manager


Application Components (SAP)
Tool to install corrections on an R/3 System (transaction SPAM).

Support Release
Upgrade General (BCUPG)
Consists of a particular release and all SAP Support Packages available at a certain point in time (Basis Support Packages, R/3 Support Packages, R/3 HR Support Packages, and so on). It can take a long time to import all Support Packages available for a release, so SAP recommends that you upgrade to a Support Release.

surcharge

307

Contract Billing (ISUBI)


Amount established in the contract or rate that is included in the customer's bill amount. Surcharges do not refer to amounts that a utility company collects only for forwarding to another entity, such as taxes and duties.

surplus delivery
Retail (ISR)
If a delivery is not included in picking wave creation on a compare date, it becomes a 'surplus delivery' for picking wave creation at a later date.

surrogate area
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Character supplement for characters that cannot be contained in standard Unicode (which can only contain 65,536 characters). In addition to the standard Unicode bit pattern, the system reads two further bytes from this area.

survey
CrossApplication Components (CA)
A survey is a questionnaire that can be sent. It consists essentially of the questionnaire and details of the recipients. The survey is created, published and sent in the survey administration. The responses of the recipients are also collected here. Repsonse data (e.g. statistical data, CO planning data) can be posted directly in some R/3 components.

survey administration
CrossApplication Components (CA)
All survey worksteps from selecting the questionnaire to publishing and posting the results.

surviving order
Manufacturing Execution System (ISHTMES)
Process order which receives additional quantities from another process order in a process order merge. The surviving order is merged with the merging order, and becomes the process order which is processed.

308

suspension
Commissions (ISISCS)
Suspension of a contract in terms of insurance benefits (cover) and premium payment. A contract can be suspended if coverage is to cease for a certain period. Possible reasons for suspending a contract can be: Season (for example, where insurance for a motorcycle applies only to the summer months). Temporary unemployment Temporary residence abroad Illness

suspension system
Foreign Trade (SDFT)
The levying of customs duties or other customs activity for foreign merchandise is waived or "suspended" in certain situations. Examples include the transit procedure, bonded warehouses, conversion and termporary use of foreign merchandise.

swap
Treasury Management (TRTM)
Exchange transaction based on the interest rate/currency. There are three basic types of swaps in SAP Treasury Management: Currency swap: A combination of a spot transaction and an opposing forward transaction. The currency amount, sold in the short transaction, is repurchased when the forward transaction is due. The two currencies are exchanged at the previously fixed rate for the period between the conclusion dates of both transactions. The forward transaction rate is based on the spot transaction rate and the swap rate for the interval between both conclusion dates. Interest rate swap: Exchange transactions with a term of more than one year, based on different interest rates in the same currency. The system can represent the exchange of fixed and variable interest or variable and variable interest, based on different interest rates. Crosscurrency interest rate swap: An exchange of payment flows, consisting of interest and capital payments in different currencies. Fixed or variable transactions are exchanged in any combination.

swap file

309

Memory Management (BCCSTMM)


File into which data is paged out.

swap rate
Treasury Management (TRTM)
Markup or markdown (report) showing the difference between the spot and forward rate. It is determined using the interest rate difference between investments and borrowings of the same period in the respective currencies.

swap space
Memory Management (BCCSTMM)
Hard disk space used to store data from the main memory that is not currently needed, freeing up space for the current program. This storage process is also called (operating system) paging.

swaption
Treasury Management (TRTM)
Option on an interest rate swap. The purchaser can choose to either pay fixed interest upon exercising the option (payer swaption), or to receive the fixed interest payment (receiver swaption). In return for this right, the purchaser pays the seller a premium.

SWIFT code
Financial Accounting (FI)
Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunication. Within the context of international payment transactions, the SWIFT code (standard throughout the world) enables banks to be identified without the need to specify an address or bank number. SWIFT codes are used mainly for automatic payment transactions.

SWIN
Print and Output Management (BCCCMPRN)
Generic device type for Windows printers.

310

Swiss adjustment
Real Estate Management (RE)
Countryspecific adjustment method according to Swiss law using absolute and relative factors that take the rent reserve into account.

switch
Customer Service (CS)
Phone systems and other devices that connect calls.

Switch off
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Standard function in the R/3 System. You use this function to switch off an option.

Switch on
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Standard function in the R/3 System. You use this function to switch on an option.

Switch view
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Function in user menu. When maintaining the user menu, you can use this function to switch between the following views: List view Browser view

switchover software
High Availability (BCCCMHAV)
Automated means of starting a failed service on a different physical host machine. 311

Switchover software (SOSW) reduces unplanned downtime by enabling rapid resumption of a failed service on a substitute host. R/3 System services that are normally susceptible to failure because they cannot be configured on multiple hosts (that is, DBMS, enqueue and message services) can benefit from the extra resilience of SOSW. The substitute host must be sufficiently powerful to support the additional workload following switchover. SOSW can also reduce planned downtime, when a deliberate switchover is made for maintenance purposes (that is, without any failure). The term "failover" is sometimes used to refer exclusively to the case when failure has occurred. However, this usage is not universal at present.

symbol
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Pictorial representation of an object or function. Symbols are scaleable graphical characters that appear only in lists. In contrast to icons, symbols adapt to the font size. Like other characters, they can only have one foreground and one background color.

symbol
Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Object in a report template. It links document template and SAP application data and controls data formatting in the document. During the generation of a report, symbols are replaced by data transferred from the SAP component Product Safety and other SAP applications. Symbols are used for both data retrieval and control.

symbol
SAPscript (BCSRVSCR)
Standardized module. Symbols are constants that can be inserted in a document. They save the user unnecessary work when replacing sections of text, phrases, etc. Possible symbol types are: System symbols Program symbols Standard symbols Text symbols 312

symbol for data retrieval


Environment, Health Safety (EHS)
Symbol that defines the how and where data is to be retrieved from the SAP database for inclusion in a report. Three types of symbols are used for data retrieval: Symbol References data in specification management. Parameter References data in other SAP applications, for example, delivery data required to generate an MSDS. Description (phrase) Reference phrases in a phrase library. The language key for the document language determines which phrase text is transferred to the report. As a rule, such symbols are used to define headings, chapter headings, and descriptions for values.

symbolic account
Payroll (PY)
Payroll object used when posting results to accounting. The number of symbolic accounts and the respective characteristics represent the different expenses and payables that occur as personnel costs within payroll and must be posted to accounting. The sysmbolic accounts are assigned to financial accounts. This ensures that account determination takes place during posting to accounting.

symbolic name
Special Purpose Ledger (FISL)
Name entered in a set header or set line which pinpoints the row and column coordinates of a cell or key figure within a report. Symbolic set line names refer to a value or a set name in a set line. Symbolic set header names refer to all values in a set.

symptom
Customer Service (CS)
A change in a product or system that indicates a malfunction of some type. A symptom can be described by freeform text and catalog code attributes. A symptom can refer to any R/3 business object, such as a sales order or repair order. Symptoms, along with solutions, are stored and linked in the Solution Database. The Solution 313

Database can be searched from problem notifications as well as from the Customer Interaction Center Front Office by entering freeform text or attributes to find one or more appropriate symptoms, from which one or more solutions can be accessed.

synchronization
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APOPPS)
A scheduling function for multi resources that is automatically executed by the system and by which the system schedules activities with the same duration and with a further common characteristic either simultaneously or, if this is not possible, without overlaps. The characteristic is represented by a setup group that is assigned to the operation in the production process model. For example, when synchronization is carried out, tempering activities that have the same duration and that have to be executed at the same temperature can be scheduled simultaneously at an oven. In this case, a setup group represents a particular temperature.

synchronization
Graphic (BCFESGRA)
The coordination of two or more graphics with respect to an event. The event is sent from one graphic to another without the application necessarily being informed of this.

synchronization
Internet Transaction Server / SAP@Web Studio (BCFESITS)
Mechanism used by the Internet Transaction Server (ITS) to ensure that R/3 transaction screens and their corresponding HTML templates are always in step, both in singleframe and multiframe applications.

synchronization job
Graphic (BCFESGRA)
The application sends the multiplexer synchronization jobs that specify for events which graphics proxy is the master and which the slave(s).

synchronous archiving
Generic Business Tools (BCSRVGBT)
Storage of a document in an archive.

314

Synchronous archiving means that the archive system returns an archive document ID for the document to be archived immediately after the archive request.

synchronous goods movement


Production Backflush (ISAPPC)
Goods movement to be processed synchronously. That is, the goods movement is posted immediately on transferring the backflushing data from APO to R/3. You must set the indicator "synchronous posting GI" in the APO product master for materials whose goods movements are to be posted immediately. Goods receipts are always posted immediately irrespective of the indicator in the product master.

synchronous method
SAP Business Workflow (BCBMTWFM)
Method that assumes process control for the duration of its execution and reports back to the calling component (in this case the work item manager) after its execution. Terminating events can be defined for a task described by a synchronous object method. At runtime, the relevant work item is completed either when the method has been processed or when one of the events occurs. A synchronous method can return the following data to the workflow: Return parameters One result Exceptions

synchronous retrieval
SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Transfer of stored documents in file form to an R/3 directory. The retrieval request is executed and confirmed directly.

synchronous storing
SAP ArchiveLink (BCSRVARL)
Storage of a document in an external storage system. In synchronous storing, the storage system returns a document ID for the stored document to the R/3System straight after the storage request.

syntactical character set


315

Environment, Health Safety (EHS)


Set of characters that are the same in all code pages used in the R/3 System and in all code pages based on ASCII. The characters in the syntactical character set are mapped in Asian languages also using one byte only. This achieves the result that texts that consist exclusively of characters in the syntactical character set always appear the same and always appear correctly, independent of which code page they were entered in or output with. The syntactical character set consists of 7bit ASCII characters without control characters, which means the following characters: A B C through Z a b c through z 0 1 2 through 9 "%&'()*+,./:;<=>?_

syntax group
Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
A syntax group contains the names of all operating systems that use the same syntax for assigning file names.

synthetic profile
Energy Data Management (ISUEDM)
Profile containing values generated on the basis of predefined periods (day and season groups) and corresponding day and annual profiles. Synthetic profiles are used for classifying customers or customer groups.

System
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Menu displayed on the menu bar of all screens in the R/3 System. The "System" menu contains functions like "Create session" and "Log off" that affect the entire system. The "System" menu is always displayed with the "Help" menu to the right of any other menus in the menu bar.

System Administration Assistant


ReadytoRun R/3 (BCRRR)
Online tool for simple administration of the R/3 System. 316

The System Administration Assistant provides comprehensive information on all aspects of system administration, and orders administration tasks according to the frequency with which they have to be carried out. Its hierarchical structure and systemspecific information makes the job of the administrator easier, and also includes the option of jumping directly to R/3 transactions.

system architecture
Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
Setup and basic structure of an IT system. This term may also cover software, its setup and development. Examples: The way data and programs are stored The method used for system control The type of interfaces possible The structure of the operating system, and how it works

system attribute
Change Transport System (BCCTS)
Feature assigned to the R/3 System concerned, for example transport layer.

system availability
Plant Maintenance (PM)
Business ratio describing the degree of usability of a system. It is determined as the ratio of available time to the base time, and entered as part of the completion confirmation in Plant Maintenance. System availability comprises the following data: Time and duration of the breakdown Availability of the technical object before, during and after the maintenance task Operating status of the technical object before, during and after the maintenance task

system backup
ReadytoRun R/3 (BCRRR)
During a system backup the database of an SAP system and the current log files are saved. In a productive system, an uptodate backup must be available at all times, with which the system can be reproduced if an error occurs.

317

system change option


Change Transport System (BCCTS)
Global setting in the Workbench Organizer. The following settings are possible: Objects cannot be changed. Only original objects (with Workbench Organizer). All customer objects (with Workbench Organizer). All objects (with Workbench Organizer).

system contract
Advertising Management (ISMAM)
Variant of the standard contract that can be created automatically by the system.

system date
(CATTE)
Day on which document is created in system.

system field
ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Systemdefined data object. All system fields conform to the naming convention SY<name>, where <name> denotes the field. You can display a list of system fields in the ABAP Editor. Examples: SYSUBRC return code SYUNAME user name SYDATUM current date SYUZEIT current time SYTCODE current transaction

system infrastructure

318

AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Specific combination of systems as installed at a customer site. The system infrastructure describes the R/3 Systems and clients required, and their purpose. It also includes the transport paths for implementation and maintenance purposes. The main tools used are the client copy and the transport system. The system infrastructure could, for example, include a development system, a test system, and a production system.

system inventory record


Logistics Execution (LE)
Document used for carrying out inventory in the system. The system inventory record is used in the following tasks: planning and executing the physical inventory entering the counted results clearing the differences

system landscape
Change Transport System (BCCTS)
System landscape describes the systems and clients required, and their significance, as well as the transport routes for the implementation andmaintenance processes. Tools that stand in the foreground in particular are Client Copy and the Change and Transport System. The system landscape may, for example, comprise a development system, a test system, and a production system.

system language
Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
Language that is mapped by the current character set of the application server. The current character set is determined by the active code page of the application server.

system list
Change Transport System (BCCTS)
Import overview restriction to a number of predefined systems. 319

system log
Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
Recorded log of errors and events in the R/3 System. The system log contains information about program and transaction terminations, database errors, and so on.

system log record


Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
Data record, which records an event in the system. Examples of events recorded are: An update of a document An update termination The call of a transaction A change made to a table

system maintenance
Upgrade General (BCUPG)
Program corrections shipped at relatively frequent intervals that do not normally affect your productive operation. The most important corrections are made available at short notice as Hot Packages.

system menu
Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Menu displayed by pressing the system menu button which appears to the left of the screen title in the menu bar. The system menu contains options such as those allowing you to change the size of a window or close it completely.

system menu button


Graphical User Interface (BCFESGUI)
Button for displaying the system menu. The system menu button is located in the top left corner of the menu bar on every screen in the R/3 System.

320

system message
Client/Server Technology (BCCST)
Short messages to all users of an R/3 System. System messages are created and sent with the transaction ST02. The user receives the message immediately or at the next logon if he or she was not logged on when the message was created.

system monitor
Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
Monitors the starting and stopping of instances and displays the instance status depending on the operation mode. It can also display the alert status and alert details of instances.

system organizational unit


AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Object type in the R/3 Reference Model. System organizational units are the elements of the R/3 System that you use to portray the organizational units and structure of your enterprise in your R/3 System. You can set up the system organizational unit using the corresponding IMG activities.

system parameter
Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)
Basic system configuration to ensure that the software runs smoothly. A system parameter is a variable defined according to the requirements of the system environment. Examples: Parameters for adjusting the R/3 System to your host environment Parameters for flow control Parameters for defining the size of memory areas

system performance

321

Computing Center Management System (BCCCM)


Measure of the efficiency of an EDP system.

system platform
Application Components (SAP)
Combination of database and operating system.

system PSE
Security (BCSEC)
Personal Security Environment (PSE) for the SAP System. The system PSE is created during the system's installation process and contains the system's security information (for example, the publickey pair. In Release 4.5A, each application server receives its own system PSE, and as of Release 4.5B, the system creates a single system PSE and distributes it to all of the application servers.

system setting
Change Transport System (BCCTS)
SAP system group setup within the R/3 System.

system setting
Customizing Tools (Techniques) (BCCUSTOL)
Entries which the customer must make in tables to implement an SAP System. System settings are made via Execute project (transaction SPRO) in the Implementation Guide (IMG).

system setting
Customizing Tools (Techniques) (BCCUSTOL)
Entries in tables to (pre)configure an SAP System. SAP settings are referred to as standard settings (default Customizing settings); settings by customers as Customizing settings.

system setting

322

AcceleratedSAP (SVASA)
Establishing an enterprise's own processes/functions, as defined in the conceptual design, in the R/3 System by configuring Customizing objects.

system status
CrossApplication Components (CA)
A status which the system sets internally as a part of general status management. This status tells the user that a certain business transaction was carried out for an object.

system symbol
SAPscript (BCSRVSCR)
Placeholder used in the SAPscript editor. System symbols are given values from the R/3 System when the document is printed. Possible system symbols are: Date Day Time Page number

system template
Internet Transaction Server / SAP@Web Studio (BCFESITS)
HTML template used by the Internet Transaction Server (ITS) to send messages to clients requesting ITS services, and to insert runtime information dynamically. Examples of system templates are runtime error messages, logon pages and endofsession pages.

system type
Change Transport System (BCCTS)
Function of a system in the SAP system group from the point of view of the Transport Organizer. The system types are: Integration system Consolidation system 323

Recipient system Special development system

system user
Users and Authorizations (BCCCMUSR)
User which is only used to check authorizations for certain system activities (background, CPIC, etc.) It is not an interactive user type.

system variable
User enhancements for tests (CACAT)
Variable, which returns system information.

systemdefined data object


ABAP Runtime Environment (BCABA)
Data object that is automatically available when you start an ABAP program. Systemdefined data objects do not have to be declared.

Syukko
Japan (PYJP)
A process in Japan to loan own company's employees to other companies for a long term, which are often affiliates of employee's domicile company. It doesn't change employee's main contract.

324

You might also like